02 130205 V7.13 EVRC2A-N6, NT Manual Control

Release Date: Feb. 2013 / Manual Revision: 7.
13
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT

USERS MANUAL
ENTEC
ENTEC
ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO., LTD
Copyright 2002 by ENTEC ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO., LTD all right reserved.
Forerunner Distribution & Automation
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Release Note:
[Oct. 2006] Ver4.00

1.
Add explanations for new additional function below

- Support ETHERNET Port(Port4) for EVRC2A
- Support IEC60870-5-104 Protocol Communication (add the setup menu)
[Sept. 2007] Ver4.10

1.

- Dialing Modem Support(add the setup menu)
[Sept. 2009] Ver4.12

1.

- Support IEC60870-5-101 Protocol Communication (add the setup menu)
- Support Overfrequency Protection Element (add the setup menu)
[Jan. 2010] Ver5.00

After the Ver5.00, the manual is applied to the EVRC2A-N(Network type).
1.
Support ETIMS(ENTEC Integration Management Software) function(add the setup menu).

This function is used to interface with ETIMS over Ethernet port.
2.
Separate Communication setting into Protocol and Port settings.
3.
Describe elements consisting of Protection section in order of the menu shown in LCD.
4.
Add CLOSE Function at Normal Frequency restored in Frequency element.
5.
Add the description related with STATUS menu omitted in the previous version.
6.
Add the description related with MAINTENANCE menu omitted in the previous version.
7.
Add Fault Trip(option) in EVENT RECORDER menu.
[Jul. 2010] Ver5.10

1.
Add contents of RVD(Resistance Voltage Divider), one of Voltage Divider Inputs.
[Sep. 2010] Ver5.11

1.
Add 6.10. Set Group Change.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
[Mar. 2011] Ver5.20

1.
Add Loss of Phase in PROTECTION menu according to an additional function (option),

Loss of Phase.
2.
Add Supply Outage Measurement as an additional function in menu.

- Add S-Outage and S-O Dura set-up in RELAY SETUP/ EVENT RECORDER menu.
- Add S-Outage Count and S-Outage Event set-up in RELAY SETUP/ CLEAR SAVED
DATA menu.
- Add S-OUTAGE COUNTER in MAINTENANCE menu.
- Add SUPPLY OUTAGE in EVENT RECORDER menu.
[Jan. 2012] Ver6.00

After the Ver6.00, the manual is applied to the EVRC2A-N6(Network type).
[Jan. 2012] Ver6.00
1.
Change the terms related with battery testing.
[Feb. 2012] Ver6.01

1.
Add Power Quality set-up in SYSTEM SETUP menu.
2.
Change Supply Outage to Power Quality in some menus.

- Change S-Outage Counter to Power Quality in MAINTENANCE menu.
- Change Supply Outage to Power Quality in EVENT RECORDER menu.
- Change S-Outage Count and S-Outage Event to P-Quality Count and P-Quality in
RELAY SETUP/ CLEAR SAVED DATA menu.
3.
Add HARMONICS in MAIN MENU/6.METERING menu.
[Jun. 2012] Ver6.02

Changed the manual based on EVRC2A-N6 firmware V6.12 upgrading.
1.
Section to be rectified in the manual as a result of adding measuring function of

voltage/current unbalance.
- Change METERING in 1.2. Summary of Features.
- Change Table 2-1. Metering Accuracy in 2.3. Metering Accuracy.
- Add 10.1.9. Unbalance.
- Change Table 10-1. Metering Accuracy in 10.2. Accuracy.
2.
Section to be rectified in the manual as a result of adding detection function of

voltage/current unbalance.
- Change MONITORING in 1.2. Summary of Features.
ii
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
- Change RECORDER in 1.2. Summary of Features.

- Add Power Quality in 2.5. Monitoring.
- Change SYSTEM EVENT RECORDER, POWER QUALITY EVENT RECORDER,
COUNTER in 2.6. Recorder.
- Change Figure 3-12. Menu Structure Tree in 3.2.1. Main Menu Summary.
- Add settings for Unbalance in 6.10. Power Quality.
- Add Unbalance Counter in 11.4. Power Quality.
- Change 12.2. System Event Recorder.
- Change 12.6. Power Quality Event Recorder.
3.
Section to be rectified in the manual as a result of adding Daily Max I and Daily Energy
settings.
- Change 5.2.5. EVENT&ETC.
4.
Section to be rectified in the manual as a result of changed range of reclose interval 1.

- Change Reclose interval 1 in 2.4. Protection Elements/ Reclose Control.
- Change Range of Reclose 1 in 7.1. Reclose(79).
[Aug. 2012] Ver7.00

Changed the manual based on EVRC2A_N6 firmware V6.15 upgrading.
1.
Change 5.3. Clock.
2.
Change 5.8. Time Set & Display Type.

- Add Set Type, GMT Sign, GMT Hour, GMT Min and Evt Send Type set-up in
RELAY SETUP/ TIME SET & DIS TYPE menu.
3.
Change SEF Pickup Current Setup in 7.4. Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF).
4.
Change 9.3. Clock.
5.
Change 10.1.4. Synchro Voltage.
6.
Change Table 14-1. Warning Events in 14.1. Warning Events.
[Nov. 2012] Ver7.10

1.
Changed the manual based on EVRC2A_NT firmware V7.04 upgrading.

- Change 5.2.2.1. DNP 3.0 Protocol Option : Add Time Req(m) set-up in
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 and DNP2 menu.
- Change 5.2.3.1. PORT2-RS232 : Add Parity Bit, Data Bit and Stop Bit set-up in
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1-RS232 menu.
- Change 5.2.5. EVENT&ETC : Add Time Syn Ref and Evt Time Type set-up in
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC menu.
- Change 5.8. Time Set & Display Type Option : Add Time Syn Ref set-up in RELAY
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
iii
SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE menu.

2.
Changed the manual based on EVRC2A_NT firmware V7.06 upgrading.

- Change 5.2.2.2. IEC60870-5-101 Protocol Option : Add the setting items in
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / IEC60870-5-101 menu.
- Change 5.2.2.3. IEC60870-5-104 Protocol Option : Add the setting items in
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / IEC60870-5-104 menu.
- Change 6.3. Line VL Sensing : Add Install Type set-up in SYSTEM SETUP / LINE
VL SENSING menu.
3.
Change the description for SKIP at Fault and Fault I Evt setting in 5.2.5.
EVENT&ETC.
4.
Add the Note in 6.4. System Power.
[Nov. 2012] Ver7.12

1.
Changed the manual based on EVRC2A_NT firmware V7.07 upgrading : Delete Tx Delay
set-up in COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 and DNP2 menu.
- Change the description for Tx Delay setting in 5.2.2.1. DNP3.0 Protocol Option.
2.
Change the description for TX Post Delay and TX Pre Delay in 5.2.3.1. PORT2
RS232.
3.
Change the setting examples of Use of VD(CVD or RVD) in 6.2. Line VS Sensing / 6.2.3.
Setting Examples.
[Dec. 2012] Ver7.12

1.
Add the Note in 5.8. Time Set & Display Type Option.
2.
Add the Note in 5.2.5. EVENT&ETC.
3.
Change Figure 7-33. Non Standard Curves (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18) in 7.18. Time
Overcurrent Curves.
[Feb. 2013] Ver7.13

1.
Add the Notes in 2.4. Protection Elements.
2.
Add the Note of SEF Pickup Current Setup in 7.4. Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF).
3.
Add the Note of SEF setting in 7.12.3. Cold Load Pickup Setup.
4.
Add the Note in 9.4. Control Type.
iv
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................... 1
1.1. Description .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.2. Summary of Features .......................................................................................................... 2
2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................. 5
2.1. Inputs and Outputs .............................................................................................................. 5
2.2. Type Withstand Tests ........................................................................................................... 8
2.3. Metering Accuracy .............................................................................................................. 9
2.4. Protection Elements........................................................................................................... 11
2.5. Monitoring......................................................................................................................... 16
2.6. Recorder ............................................................................................................................ 19
2.7. Communications................................................................................................................ 22
3. USER INTERFACE PANEL ........................................................................................ 23

3.1. Construction ...................................................................................................................... 24
3.2. LCD Display ..................................................................................................................... 33
3.3. Using the LCD Menu ........................................................................................................ 37
4. SELECT SETBANK ..................................................................................................... 40

5. RELAY SETUP .............................................................................................................. 41
5.1. Passcode ............................................................................................................................ 41
5.2. Communication ................................................................................................................. 42
5.3. Clock ................................................................................................................................. 76
5.4. Event Recorder .................................................................................................................. 78
5.5. Clear Saved Data ............................................................................................................... 79
5.6. Factory Debug ................................................................................................................... 79
5.7. Gas Sensor Type ................................................................................................................ 80
5.8. Time Set & Display Type Option ................................................................................... 80
6. SYSTEM SETUP ........................................................................................................... 82

6.1. Current Sensing ................................................................................................................. 82
6.2. Line VS Sensing ................................................................................................................ 84
6.3. Line VL Sensing ................................................................................................................ 86
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
6.4. System Power .................................................................................................................... 88

6.5. Panel Sleep Time ............................................................................................................... 91
6.6. Opto Input Set - Option ..................................................................................................... 91
6.7. Output Relay Set - Option ................................................................................................. 93
6.8. Loop Control - Option ....................................................................................................... 96
6.9. Set Group Change - Option ............................................................................................. 115
6.10. Power Quality - Option ................................................................................................. 116
7. PROTECTION ............................................................................................................ 120

7.1. Reclose (79)..................................................................................................................... 122
7.2. Phase (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrents (51P) .................................................................. 128
7.3. Ground (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrent (51G) ................................................................ 132
7.4. Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) ............................................................................................. 136
7.5. Negative Sequence (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrent (46) .......................................................... 138
7.6. Phase High Current Trip (50P-1)..................................................................................... 142
7.7. Ground High Current Trip (50G-1) ................................................................................. 144
7.8. Negative Sequence High Current Trip (46(50)-1) ........................................................... 146
7.9. Phase High Current Lockout (50P-2) .............................................................................. 148
7.10. Ground High Current Lockout (50G-2) ........................................................................ 150
7.11. Negative Sequence High Current Lockout (46(50)-2) ............................................................ 152
7.12. Cold Load Pickup .......................................................................................................... 154
7.13. Directional Controls (67)............................................................................................... 162
7.14. Undervoltage (27).......................................................................................................... 170
7.15. Overvoltage (59)............................................................................................................ 172
7.16. Frequency(81) ............................................................................................................... 174
7.17. Other Element................................................................................................................ 177
7.18. Time Overcurrent Curves .............................................................................................. 180
7.19. Loss of Phase - Option .................................................................................................. 207
8. MONITORING ........................................................................................................... 208

8.1. Demand ........................................................................................................................... 208
8.2. Synchronism Check (25) ................................................................................................. 211
8.3. Trip Counter .................................................................................................................... 213
8.4. Recloser Wear .................................................................................................................. 215
8.5. Battery Test...................................................................................................................... 217
8.6. Fault Locator ................................................................................................................... 218
8.7. Gas Low Lock Option .................................................................................................. 220
vi
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8.8. EXT Trip & Lock Option ............................................................................................ 220

8.9. Live Load Block Option ............................................................................................... 221
9. STATUS ........................................................................................................................ 222

9.1. OPTO Inputs ................................................................................................................... 222
9.2. Relay Outputs .................................................................................................................. 222
9.3. Clock ............................................................................................................................... 223
9.4. Control Type .................................................................................................................... 224
10. METERING ............................................................................................................... 225

10.1. Metering Elements ........................................................................................................ 226
10.2. Accuracy ........................................................................................................................ 235
11. MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................................... 237

11.1. Counters......................................................................................................................... 237
11.2. Wear Monitor................................................................................................................. 237
11.3. Output Relay Test .......................................................................................................... 238
11.4. Power Quality - Option ................................................................................................. 239
12. EVENT RECORDER................................................................................................ 241

12.1. Waveform Capture ........................................................................................................ 241
12.2. System Event Recorder ................................................................................................. 245
12.3. Load Profile ................................................................................................................... 247
12.4. Diagnostic Event Recorder............................................................................................ 250
12.5. Fault Trip Event Recorder - Option............................................................................... 252
12.6. Power Quality Event Recorder - Option ....................................................................... 254
13. INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................... 257

13.1. User Interface Door and Power Switch ......................................................................... 257
13.2. Vent and Outer Cover .................................................................................................... 258
13.3. Dimensions and Mounting Plan .................................................................................... 259
13.4. Earth Wiring Diagram ................................................................................................... 261
13.5. Inner Structure ............................................................................................................... 262
13.6. Mount Accessories Dimensions .................................................................................... 263
13.7. User-Available DC Power ............................................................................................. 264
13.8. Terminal Block and Fuses ............................................................................................. 265
13.9. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram VD Type .......................................................................... 266
13.10. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram - VT Type ......................................................................... 267
13.11. Side Panel .................................................................................................................... 268
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
vii
13.12. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram ................................................................................... 269

13.13. VD Wiring Diagram .................................................................................................... 270
13.14. VT Wiring Diagram ..................................................................................................... 271
13.15. Current and Voltage Inputs Phase Rotation ................................................................. 272
13.16. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions ................................................................ 273
13.17. Control Cable Assembling / De-assembling................................................................ 275
13.18. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions ...................................................................... 275
13.19. AC Power Cable .......................................................................................................... 276
13.20. Fuses ............................................................................................................................ 276
13.21. Battery and Control run time ....................................................................................... 277
13.22. Charge Circuit ............................................................................................................. 278
13.23. Battery Change ............................................................................................................ 278
13.24. Battery Protection ........................................................................................................ 278
13.25. Communications .......................................................................................................... 279
13.26. Communication Cables ............................................................................................... 281
13.27. Hardware Block Diagram ............................................................................................ 282
13.28. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits ................................................................................. 283
13.29. Uninterruptible Power Supply for Trip & Close ......................................................... 284
13.30. Main Board .................................................................................................................. 285
13.31. Analog Board............................................................................................................... 286
13.32. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram ................................................................................... 287
13.33. Recloser EPR Wiring Diagram .................................................................................... 288
13.34. Recloser Current Transformer (CT) ............................................................................ 289
13.35. Recloser Voltage Divider (VD) ................................................................................... 289
13.36. Recloser Pressure Sensor (Only EVR Type) ............................................................... 290
13.37. Recloser 52 contact and 69 contact ............................................................................. 292
13.38. Recloser Trip and Close Coil....................................................................................... 292
13.39. Recloser Test Kit ......................................................................................................... 293
14. MAINTANANCE ...................................................................................................... 294

14.1. Warning Events ............................................................................................................. 294
14.2. Malfunction Events ....................................................................................................... 296
viii
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. Description
y
EVRC2A with the microprocessor-based digital control technology is designed to provide

protective coordination and fault clearance of distribution systems for the continuous best
quality of electric service.
Remote monitoring and control can be provided by RTU(Remote Terminal Unit - Option)
which fundamentally installed.
In order to perform the protection function, line voltage and current signal filtered with
analog filter and digital DFT full-cosin filter is used.
EVRC2A provides protection, control, and monitoring functions with both local and remote.
It also displays the present trip/alarm conditions, and measured system parameters.
Recording of past trip, alarm or control events, maximum demand levels, and energy
metering is also performed.
Users can operate Close and Trip, and also control EVRC2A with key buttons on the user
interface panel; Protection Enabled, Ground Enabled, SEF Enabled, Reclose Enabled,
Control Locked, Remote enabled, Alternate-settings, Program 1, Program 2, Hot line tag.
Users can manage the Recloser interface software using a portable PC for modification of
settings, acquisition of event data, and management of operation history.
EVRC2A contains many T-C characteristic curves developed by IEEE C37.112, IEC255-3,
McGraw Edison, and KEPCO to provide fully protective coordination for the continuous
best quality of electric distribution. Users can select any time of current curve simply by
programming and modifying.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
1.2. Summary of Features

PROTECTION
y
Phase Instantaneous Over-current Element
Phase Time Over-current Elements
Phase Definite Time High Current Lockout Element
Ground Instantaneous Over-current Element
Ground Time Over-current Elements
Ground Definite Time High Current Lockout Element
Sensitive Earth Fault Elements
Negative Instantaneous Over-current Element
Negative Time Over-current Elements
Negative Definite Time High Current Lockout Element
Phase, Ground, Sensitive Earth and Negative Sequence Directional Control
Automatic Reclosing(Up To 4 Shots)
Cold Load Pickup with Voltage Control
Sequence Coordination Control
Two Under-voltage Elements
Two Over-voltage Elements
Under-frequency Element
Over-frequency Element
Loop Control - Option
Loss of Phase - Option
METERING
Phase, Ground and Sensitive Ground Current and Phasors
Line and Phase Voltage and Phasors(Source Side and Load Side)
Current and Voltage Symmetrical Component Phasors
Frequency Magnitude and Rate
Synchronizing Voltage, Phasor and Frequency
Synchronizing Delta, Delta and Delta Leg
Single and Three Phase Power(MW, Mvar, MVA, PF)
Energy(MWh, Mvarh)
Maximum Demand(Ia, Ib, Ic, MW, Mvar, MVA)
Voltage and current harmonics - Option
Voltage and current unbalance - Option

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
MONITORING
y
Fault Locator
Demand trip and alarm(Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, I2)
Trip Counter Limit
Synchronism Check
Recloser main contact Wear(Per Phase)
Recloser Operation Failure
Voltage Transformer Failure
Battery Automatic Load Test
Breaker Failure with Current Supervision
Power Quality - Option
Recloser Gas Over and Low pressure - Option

NOTE : According to a recloser type, there may be no gas pressure monitoring.
COMMUNICATIONS
y
Front Panel PORT1 RS232 Serial Port : EVRC2A interface software
Side panel PORT2 RS232 Serial Port : EVRC2A interface software , DNP 3.0, MODBUS or
IEC60870-5-101 Protocol - Option
Side panel PORT3 RS485 or R232* Serial Port : DNP 3.0, MODBUS or IEC60870-5-101
Protocol Option
Side panel PORT4 RJ45 Port : DNP 3.0, MODBUS or IEC60870-5-104 Protocol and
EVRC2A interface software Option
NOTE : The Port3 type of EVRC2A-N is a fixed RS485 port. However, the Port3 type of
EVRC2A-N6,NT can be selected as RS485 or RS232 by a user. In order to use
RS485 port for EVRC2A-N6,NT, the Pin4 and Pin5 of RS485 should be connected.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECORDER
y
Trip and fault counter
Supply outage counter and time Option
Sag/Swell detection counter Option
Voltage and current unbalance detection counter - Option
System event recorder - last 2048 events
Diagnostic event recorder - last 512 events
Load profile recorder - last 213days
Fault Waveform - 15 cycles 32 events
Fault trip event recorder - last 512 events - Option
Power Quality event recorder - last 512 events - Option
USER INTERFACE
y
Fault indicators
Manual Battery Load Test: Battery Voltage and Charge Voltage
Dual Functional keypads
204 Character Display(LCD or VFD : Vacuum Fluorescent Display)
32 LED indicators - Fault indications, sequence status, battery status, etc
RS232 port
Context Help Messages
Access Security(Passcode)
AUXILIARY OUTPUTS - Option

y
7 Programmable Relays
1 Programmable Alarm Relay
AUXILIARY INPUTS - Option

y
8 Opto-isolated Programmable Inputs
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.1. Inputs and Outputs
Systems
y
3phase-3wire or 3phase-4wire, 38 maximum, 800 Amp maximum
Frequency
y
50 / 60 system and ABC/ACB phase rotation
Control Voltage Input

y
AC Voltage Input 110V/220Vac or other voltage (+10%,-15%)
Nominal Battery Voltage : 24Vdc
Based on user requirement, prepare 110V/220V Selectable Switch - Option
User available DC power Output - Option

y
DC Power Voltage : 12, 15, 24Vdc
DC Power Continuous : 40W
DC Power for 60Sec : 60W
Voltage Divider Inputs (VD) - Standard

Capacitor Voltage Divider Inputs (CVD) Only EVR
y Maximum Input Voltage : 5V
y Burden : 2e-6 VA
y System Voltage : 15, 27, 38
y Capacitor value
- Phase Capacitor value : 20
Resistance Voltage Divider Inputs (RVD) Only EPR
y Maximum Input Voltage : 5V
y Burden : Bow 0.0015 VA
y System Voltage : 15, 27
y Resistance value
- Phase Resistance value : 100M
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Voltage Transformer Inputs (VT) - Option

y
Voltage Inputs
EVRC2A-N : 4 Channel(VA, VB, VC and VL)
EVRC2A-N6,NT : 6 Channel
- Source Voltage 1 VA,VB,VC
- Source Voltage 2 VR,VS,VT
Input Voltage Range : Phase-Neutral Continuous <300V
Burden: 0.6VA(300V), 0.2VA(220V), 0.05VA(120V), 0.02VA(67V)
Current Transformer Inputs (CT)

y
Current Inputs IA,IB,IC and IG, SEF
IA,IB,IC,IG Input Current Range

1A Nominal
2A continuous
25A 1 second
Burden : 0.38VA(1A)
SEF Input Current Range

0.05A Nominal
0.16A Continuous
0.6A 1 second
Burden : 0.0375VA(0.05A)
Control Inputs - Option

y
Control Inputs 8 Channel
Nominal Voltages and Operating Range

250Vdc(-15%,+20%)
125Vdc(-15%,+20%)
48Vdc(-15%,+20%)
24Vdc(-15%,+20%)
12Vdc(-10%,+30%)
Operating current : < 5mA at Nominal Voltages
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Control Output Contacts - Option

y
Control Outputs 8 Channel

Normal Open 5 Channel
Normal Close 2 Channel
ALARM 1 Channel
300Vac / 350Vdc Varistor for differential surge protection
Operate / Release time : < 5ms at +20(+68)
Maximum operating power

(L/R=7ms)
(cos=0.4)
125Vdc
48Vdc
24Vdc
250Vac
125Vac
0.1A
0.8A
3A
3A
5A
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
2.2. Type Withstand Tests

Dielectric Strength
y
CT inputs, VT inputs, Control Power inputs, Opto-isolated inputs and Relay outputs
2(60) for 1 minute
Impulse Voltage
y
IEEE C62.45 (1992) Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to Radiated Electromagnetic

Interference Transceivers, 6(1.250), 3(820)
Surge Withstand Capability

y
IEEE C37.90.1 - 1989 IEEE SWC Tests for Protective Relays and Relay Systems
(3 oscillatory 1 to 1.5, 5 fast transient 1.250)
IEEE C37.90.2 - 1987 IEEE Trial-Use Standard, Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to
Radiated Electromagnetic Interference from Transceivers, 10 V/m
(150 and 450, 5 W transmitter 10)
Vibration Test
y
IEC 255-21-1 - 1988 Electrical relays, Part 21 : Vibration, shock, bump, and seismic tests on
measuring relays and protection equipment, Section One - Vibration tests (sinusoidal), Class 2.
Control Operating Temperature
Operating range : -25+70(-13+158)
LCD : -20+70(-4+158) - standard
VFD : -40+85(-40+185) - option(Vacuum Fluorescent Display)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
2.3. Metering Accuracy

The harmonic components of current and voltage are removed from the input voltage and current
parameters, so all measurements based on these quantities respond to the fundamental
components only except the measurement of harmonics.
Table 2-1. Metering Accuracy(1/2)
Measurements
Parameters
Unit
Accuracy
Range
1% of 2CT
20CT
1%
Phase A RMS Current

Phase B RMS Current
CURRENT
Phase C RMS Current

Phase G RMS Current
Phase SEF RMS Current
AN (AB) RMS Voltage
BN (BC) RMS Voltage
VOLTAGE
CN (CA) RMS Voltage

RN (RS) RMS Voltage
SN (ST) RMS Voltage*
TN (TR) RMS Voltage*
SYMMETRICAL
I1, I2, 3I0
1% of 2CT
COMPONENTS
V1, V2, 3V0
1%
Rate
0.02
1.000 to 1.000
MW
2%
32.000 to 32.000
MVar
2%
32.000 to 32.000
MVA
2%
32.000 to 32.000
MWH
2%
32000 to 32000
MVarH
2%
32000 to 32000
2%
A/B/C, 3 Real Power
MW
2%
A/B/C, 3 Reactive Power
MVar
2%
POWER FACTOR
3REAL POWER
Phase A, B, C
3 Phase
Phase A, B, C
3 Phase
3REACTIVE
Phase A, B, C
POWER
3 Phase
3APPARENT
Phase A, B, C
POWER
3 Phase
WATT-HOURS
VAR-HOURS
Phase A, B, C
3 Phase
Phase A, B, C
3 Phase
Phase A/B/C/RG Current
DEMAND
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

Measurements
FREQUENCY
Parameters
A-N (A-B) Source Voltage
R-N (R-S) Load Voltage
Unit
Accuracy
Range
0.02
40.00~70.00
1%
0% to 100%
1%
0% to 100%
1st~7th Harmonic of Current

st
HARMONICS
UNBALANCE
th
1 ~7 Harmonic of Voltage
THD of Current
3%
0% to 100%
THD of Voltage
3%
0% to 100%
Voltage unbalance(V2/V1) in source side
2%
0% to 999%
2%
0% to 999%
2%
0% to 999%
Voltage unbalance(V2/V1) in load side
Current unbalance(I2/I1)
If the VT connection type is set to delta, all single phase voltage quantities are displayed as zero.
10
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
2.4. Protection Elements

Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent Protection
Pickup Level.............................................................. OFF, 10 to 1600 in steps of 1A
Dropout Level ........................................................... 96 to 98% of Pickup
Curve Type
ANSI : Moderately, Normally, Very, Extremely, Short Inverse, Definite Time (1s ,10s)
IEC : Standard, Very, Extremely, Long, Short Inverse
ESB : Normally, Very, Long Very Inverse
User programmable curves : U1, U2, U3, U4
McGraw-Edison : Non Standard Curves 37
Time dial ................................................................... 0.05 to 15.00 in steps of 0.01
Time adder................................................................. 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01s
Minimum Response time .......................................... 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01s
Reset Type ................................................................. Instantaneous/Linear
Low Set Definite Time .............................................. 1 ~ 600 in steps of 1s
(supported from Ver 6.03 of EVRC2A-N6,NT)
Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 5% of trip time or 20
Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01s
Active Trip ................................................................ 1 to 5 in steps of 1
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... at 0 time delay (50 max)
5% of trip time or 20
Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence High Current Lockout Protection
Active Trip ................................................................ 1 to 5 in steps of 1
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
11
Sensitive Earth Definite Time Overcurrent Protection

Pickup Level*NOTE .....................................................OFF, 4 to 160 in steps of 1A(prior to Ver 6.15)
OFF, 1 to 160 in steps of 1A(from Ver 6.15)
Pickup Level Accuracy .............................................. 5%
NOTE
As per the users request, for the products that are dispatched with ZCT installed, the Pickup
Level setting range of the protection element is OFF, 0.1 to 16.0 in steps of 0.1A. To check
whether the product is dispatched with ZCT installed, check MAIN MENU/ STATUS/
CONTROL TYPE menu.
Reclose Control
Operations to Lockout - phase trip ............................ 1 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations to Lockout - ground trip .......................... 1 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations to Lockout - SEF trip .............................. 1 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations to Lockout - Negative Seq trip ............... 1 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations of Fast curve - phase trip......................... 0 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations of Fast curve - ground trip ...................... 0 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations of Fast curve - Negative Seq trip ........... 0 to 5 in steps of 1
Reclose interval 1 ...................................................... 0.50 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01(prior to Ver 6.11)
0.10 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01(from Ver 6.11)
Reclose interval 2 ...................................................... 1.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
Reset time for Auto Reclose Cycle............................ 1.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
Reset time from lockout ............................................ 1.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 5%
12
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Cold Load Pickup Blocking

Cold Load Pickup Trigger ......................................... 52A(Close) or Load Current
Phase Pickup Level ................................................... 10 to 20000 in steps of 1A
Ground Pickup Level ................................................ 10 to 20000 in steps of 1A
SEF Pickup Level*NOTE .............................................. 4 to 2000 in steps of 1A
Negative Seq Pickup Level ...................................... 10 to 20000 in steps of 1A
Reset Level ................................................................ 95 to 98% of Nominal Pickup
Outage Time .............................................................. 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s
Restore Minimum Time ............................................ 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s
Reset Time ................................................................. 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s
Cold Load Pickup Multiplier..................................... OFF, 1.0 to 5.0 in steps of 0.1
Cold Load Pickup Time Duration ............................. 1 to 720 in steps of 1min
Pickup Level Accuracy............................................. 5%
NOTE
As per the users request, for the products that are dispatched with ZCT installed, the SEF
Pickup Level setting range of the protection element is 0.4 to 200.0 in steps of 0.1A. To
check whether the product is dispatched with ZCT installed, check MAIN MENU/ STATUS/
CONTROL TYPE menu.
Phase Directional Control

Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Positive Sequence Voltage V1
Maximum Torque Angle ........................................... 0 to 359 in steps of 1
Minimum Polarizing Voltage .................................... 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT
Angle Accuracy ......................................................... 2
Internal Operation Delay ........................................... 1.5cycle
Ground/Sensitive Earth Directional Control
Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Zero Sequence Voltage Vo
For voltage element polarizing the source
VTs must be connected in Wye
Maximum Torque Angle ........................................... 0 to 359 in steps of 1
Angle Accuracy ......................................................... 2
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13
Negative Directional Control

Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Negative Sequence Voltage V2
Maximum Torque Angle............................................ 0 to 359 in steps of 1
Angle Accuracy ......................................................... 2
Undervoltage 1/2 Protection
Pickup Level .............................................................. 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT
Minimum Voltage ...................................................... 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT
Active Phases ............................................................ Any One/Any Two/All Three
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 20
Overvoltage 1/2 Protection
Pickup Level .............................................................. 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT
Active Phases ............................................................ Any One/Any Two/All Three
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 20
Under/Over frequency
Minimum Voltage ...................................................... 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT in Phase A
Minimum Current ...................................................... 10 to 1600 in steps of 1A in Phase A
Under frequency Pickup Level .................................. 40.00 to 60.00 in steps of 0.01
Over frequency Pickup Level .................................... 50.00 to 70.00 in steps of 0.01
Dropout Level ........................................................... at VT Pickup 0.02
at VD Pickup 0.05
Under/Over frequency Time Delay ........................... 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s(definite time)
Normal frequency CLOSE function .......................... OFF/ON
Normal frequency CLOSE time delay ...................... 0.0 to 6000.0 in steps of 0.1sec
Level Accuracy .......................................................... at VT 0.02, at VD 0.05
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 2cycle
14
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Loss of Phase - Option

Pickup Level.............................................................. 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT
Time Accuracy .......................................................... 20
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
15
2.5. Monitoring
Demand
Measured Values........................................................ Phase A/B/C/G Current(A)
Phase A/B/C/G 3 Real Power(MW)
Phase A/B/C/G 3 Reactive Power(Mvar)
Measurement Type .................................................... Thermal Exponential/Rolling Demand
Time Constant ........................................................... 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 or 60 min.
Phase Pickup Level ................................................... OFF, 10 to 1600 in steps of 1A
Ground Pickup Level................................................. OFF, 10 to 1600 in steps of 1A
Negative Seq Pickup Level ...................................... OFF, 10 to 1600 in steps of 1A
Level Accuracy .......................................................... 5%
Synchronism Check
Dead Voltage Maximum ............................................ 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT
Live Voltage Maximum ............................................. 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT
Maximum Voltage Difference ................................... 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT
Maximum Angle Difference ...................................... 0 to 100 in steps of 1
Maximum Frequency Difference .............................. 0.00 to 5.00 in steps of 0.01
Synchro-check Phase................................................. R(AB), S(CB), T of Load side
Trip Counters
Number of Pickup Limit............................................ 1 to 20000 in steps of 1
Trip Counter Set ........................................................ 0 to 10000 in steps of 1
Recloser Wear
Pickup Wear............................................................... 0 to 100% in steps of 0.1
Rate System ............................................................... 15, 27, 38
Rate Interrupt() ...................................................... 5.0 to 50.0 in steps of 0.1
Number of Maximum Interruption ............................ 1 to 999 in steps of 1
Set Phase A Wear ....................................................... 0.0 to 100.0 % in steps of 0.1
Set Phase B Wear....................................................... 0.0 to 100.0 % in steps of 0.1
Set Phase C Wear....................................................... 0.0 to 100.0 % in steps of 0.1
Battery Test
Period for automatically check a battery ................... OFF, 1 to 7 in steps of 1day
16
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Fault Locator
Total Length of Feeder .............................................. 0.1 to 99.9 of 0.1km
Real impedance of the feeder positive seq. ............... 0.1 to 6000.0 of 0.1ohms
Imaginary impedance of the feeder positive seq. ...... 0.1 to 6000.0 of 0.1ohms
Real impedance of the feeder zero seq. ..................... 0.1 to 6000.0 of 0.1ohms
Imaginary impedance of the feeder zero seq ............. 0.1 to 6000.0 of 0.1ohms
Power Quality - Option
Detect Function of Supply Outage. ........................... DISABLE, ENABLE
Supply Outage Duration ............................................ 1 to 3600 in steps of 1s
Detect Function of Voltage Sag. ................................ DISABLE, ENABLE
Detect Level of Voltage Sag. ..................................... 0.30 to 0.95 in steps of 0.01 x VT
Detect Time of Voltage Sag. ...................................... 1 to 60 in steps of 1cycle
Detect Function of Voltage Swell. ............................. DISABLE, ENABLE
Detect Level of Voltage Swell. .................................. 1.05 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT
Detect Time of Voltage Swell. ................................... 1 to 60 in steps of 1cycle
Detect Function of Voltage Unbalance. ..................... DISABLE, ENABLE
Detect Level of Voltage Unbalance ........................... 1 to 100 in steps of 1%
Detect Time of Voltage Unbalance ............................ 0.1 to 60.0 in steps of 0.1s
Detect Function of Current Unbalance...................... DISABLE, ENABLE
Detect Level of Current Unbalance ........................... 1 to 100 in steps of 1%
Detect Time of Current Unbalance............................ 0.1 to 60.0 in steps of 0.1s
Limit Current to Detect Current Unbalance .............. 1 to 630 in steps of 1A
Level Accuracy.......................................................... 5%
NOTE : The setting for voltage/current unbalance is supported from version 6.12 of
EVRC2A-N6,NT.
Gas Low Lock - Option

Pickup Low Level ..................................................... 0.1bar
External Trip & Lock - Option
Use Input Port ........................................................... Opto Input 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 or 8
Reset Method ............................................................ LOCAL, LOCAL&REMOTE
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
17
Live Load Blocking - Option

Blocking Pickup Voltage ........................................... 0.10 to 0.90 in steps of 0.01 x VT in Load side
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 20
18
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
2.6. Recorder
WAVEFORM CAPTURE
y
Trigger Source
Protection pickup Elements
Trip command active
Data Channels
5 currents, 4 voltages, 85 logic input states, 8ch output relays, 8ch Input
Sample Rate : 16 per cycle
Trigger Position : 1 to 15cycle
Storage capacity : 32 events with 15cycle
SYSTEM EVENT RECORDER

y
Trigger Source
Protection Elements
52A Contact
Sequence status
Front panel control
AC supply
External control
Fail operation
External input status
System alarm
V1(Source), V2(Load)
Power Quality detect, etc.
Trigger Time : each 1/4 cycle
Trigger type : Pick up and Dropout
Storage Capacity : Last 2048 Events
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
19
DIAGNOSTIC EVENT RECORDER

y
Trigger Source
System Power(AC, Battery, 12V, +5V)
A/D Conversion(A/D Fail, Reference Voltage1, Reference Voltage 2)
Sleep Mode
Power Down Mode(Charge Volt High Alarm)
Setting Change
Gas Status
Alarm Status, etc.
NOTE : According to a recloser type, there may be no diagnosis of gas pressure status.
Trigger type : Pick up and Dropout
LOAD PROFILE
y
Trigger Source
Demand Current(A, B, C, G)
Demand Real Power(A, B, C, 3)
Demand Reactive Power(A, B, C, 3)
Demand Power Factor(3)
Demand Energy( 3)
Trigger Time : 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60minute
Storage Capacity : Total 5120 Events, 213days/60min.
FAULT TRIP EVENT RECORDER - Option

y
Trigger Source
Trigger elements : A,B,C,G, SEF phase and Negative Sequence
Current[A] each phase when fault occurs
Trigger type : fault occurrence
20
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
POWER QUALITY EVENT RECORDER - Option

y
Trigger Source
Trigger elements : Source, Load
Trigger type : supply outage occurrence, sag occurrence, swell occurrence, voltage unbalance
occurrence, current unbalance occurrence
NOTE : The detection of voltage/current unbalance is supported from version 6.12 of
EVRC2A-N6,NT.
COUNTER
y
Trip Counter : 0 to 65,534
Fault Counter : 0 to 65,534
System Restart Counter : 0 to 65,534
Supply Outage Counter : 0 to 60,000 - Option
Supply Outage Time : 0 to 9,999 hours - Option
Sag Counter : 0 to 60,000 - Option
Swell Counter : 0 to 60,000 Option
Voltage Unbalance(Source Side) Counter : 0 to 60,000 - Option
Voltage Unbalance(Load Side) Counter : 0 to 60,000 - Option
Current Unbalance Counter : 0 to 60,000 - Option
RECLOSER WEAR
y
Phase A Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%
Phase B Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%
Phase C Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
21
2.7. Communications
Table 2-2. Communications
Front Panel Port1
RS232, 57600bps, No Parity, 8 Data Bits, 1 Stop bit

EVRC2A Interface software
RS232, 1200-19200bps, No Parity, 8 Data bits, 1 Stop bit
Side panel Port2 - Option
DNP 3.0, Modbus or IEC60870-5-101 Protocol

and EVRC2A Interface software
RS485 or RS232*, 1200-19200bps, No Parity, 8 Data bits, 1
Side panel Port3 Option
Stop bit
DNP 3.0, Modbus or IEC60870-5-101 Protocol
RJ-45, 10BASE-T/100BASE-T
Side panel Port4 Option
DNP 3.0, Modbus or IEC60870-5-104 Protocol,

NOTE : The Port3 type of EVRC2A-N is a fixed RS485 port. However, the Port3 type of
EVRC2A-N6,NT can be selected as RS485 or RS232 by a user. In order to use
RS485 port for EVRC2A-N6,NT, the Pin4 and Pin5 of RS485 should be connected.
22
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
3. USER INTERFACE PANEL

This section describes the User Interface Panel (front-panel)
The User interface Panel control is used for;
y
Directly control the recloser
Verify control status
View system status
View metering value
View information stored in the EVRC2A unit
View and change the EVRC2A settings
Figure 3-1. User Interface Panel
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
23
3.1. Construction
Panel consists of 8 sections as below;
y
Operation section
Local control section
Fault indication section
Voltage elements section
Sequence status section
System diagnostic section
Battery test section
Menu control section
3.1.1. Operation Section

OPEN
Pressing OPEN push-button sends a trip signal to the Recloser.
CLOSE
Pressing CLOSE push-button sends a close signal to the Recloser.
Units operating with firmware version 2.18 or later have a feature of Close Time Delay. The Close
Time Delay allows a delay of 0.00 to 600.00 seconds after pressing the close push-button before
closing the recloser.
POSITION LED
Indicates the position of the Recloser. Position indicator is based on the Recloser 52a contacts.
Figure 3-2. Operation Section
24
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
3.1.2. Local Control Section

All indicators show status of Control function. The indicators are continuously ON when the
control function is enabled and the indicators are continuously OFF when control function is
DISABLE. The push-button toggles Enable/Disable.
PROTECTION ENABLED
All Protection elements are enabled
GROUND ENABLED
Ground Protection elements are enabled
SEF ENABLED
SEF Protection elements are disabled
RECLOSE ENABLED
Reclose function is enabled
CONTROL LOCKED
Front panel function is unlocked
REMOTE ENABLED
Remote control is enabled
ALTERNATE SETTINGS
Alternate setting is disabled
Figure 3-3. Local Control Section
Primary Setting is enabled

PROGRAM 1
Program 1 function is disabled
PROGRAM 2
Program 2 function is disabled
HOT LINE TAG
Hot Line Tag function is disabled
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
25
Protection Enabled
When illuminated, all protection elements are enabled. The protection enabled condition can be
disabled by pressing the Protection Enabled push button on the front panel. The front panel LED
will illuminate on each source of all protection enabling.
NOTE : Although all protection elements are enabled, ground protection elements and SEF
element are operated individually.
Ground Enabled
When Ground Enable LED is ON, the ground over-current elements are enabled. The enabled
Ground can be disabled by pressing the Ground Enabled push-button on the front panel.
SEF Enabled
When SEF Enable LED is on, the Sensitive Earth Fault(SEF) element is enabled. The enabled
SEF can be disabled by pressing the SEF Enabled push-button on the front panel.
Reclose Enabled
When Reclose Enable LED is on, the reclose(79) element is enabled. The enabled reclose
element can be disabled by pressing the Recloser Enabled push-button on the front panel.
Control Locked
When Control Locked LED is on, all functions in operation section and all functions in Local
control section are locked. These can be unlocked by pressing the Control Locked push-button
on the front panel.
NOTE : Even though Control Locked function is locked, OPEN, Lamp Test, Battery Load
Test and menu control section can be normally operated.
Remote Enabled
When Remote Enabled LED is on, all remote control functions (e.g. SCADA system) are
enabled. This can be disabled by pressing the Remote Enabled push-button on the front panel.
SCADA control refers to supported communications protocol such as DNP3.0.
Alternate Enabled
When Alternate Enabled LED is on, the Alternate setting is activated.
When Alternate Enabled LED is off, the primary setting is activated.
26
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Program 1
A function installed in Program1 is operated when Program1 LED is On.
Depending on users request, Manufacturer sets a function in Program1.
Program 2
A function installed in Program2 is operated when Program2 LED is On.
Depending on users request, Manufacturer sets a function in Program2.
Hot Line Tag
When Hot Line Tag LED is on, the Hot Line Tag function is enabled.
3.1.3. Fault Indication Section

Indicates current on the phase or neutral lines is above the minimum pickup setting as programmed
in any of the EVRC2A over-current elements.
y
Phase Instantaneous over-current Elements
Phase Time over-current Elements
Phase Definite Time High Current Lockout Element
Ground Instantaneous over-current Elements
Ground Time over-current Elements
Ground Definite Time High Current Lockout Element
Sensitive Ground Time Over-current Elements
Negative Instantaneous over-current Elements
Negative Time over-current Elements
Negative Definite Time High Current Lockout Element
Phase, Neutral, Ground, Sensitive Ground, and Negative Sequence Directional Control
Figure 3-4. Fault Indication Section
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
27
TRIP TYPE
y
INST : Shows high current trip (50-1)
DELAY : Shows delay trip(51)
HIGH CURR : Shows high current lockout(50-2)
FAULT INDICATION
y
A, B, C : Indicates an over-current fault has occurred on one of the phase lines
G : Indicates an over-current fault has occurred on the neutral line
SEF : Indicates a sensitive earth fault has occurred on the neutral line
FI RESET : Reset fault indication/Lamp test
3.1.4. Voltage Elements Section

Indicates that voltage pickup element is operated.
y
Two Under voltage Elements
Two Over voltage Elements
Synchronism Element
Under/Over frequency Element
27 : Under voltage pickup

59 : Over voltage pickup
25 : Synchronism check pickup
81 : Under/Over frequency pickup
Figure 3-5. Voltage Elements Section
28
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
3.1.5. Sequence Status Section

Indicates the current status of programmed sequence procedure.
RESET : Sequence shows resetting
CYCLE : Sequence shows running
LOCKOUT : Sequence shows lockout
Figure 3-6. Sequence Status Section
3.1.6. System Diagnostic Section

Indicates Diagnostic status of the EVRC2A. Control run indicates (green) the EVRC2A has
successfully passed its internal diagnostic test. Self Check (Red) indicates the EVRC2A has failed
in its internal diagnostic test.
CONTROL RUN
Status of EVRC2A systems shows normal
SELF CHECK
Status of EVRC2A systems shows warning
Figure 3-7. System Diagnostic Section
NOTE : Control Run LED is blinking when system functional status is normal.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
29
3.1.7. Battery Test Section

Indicates the system power status of the EVRC2A. AC supply indicates the EVRC2A has external
power source. Charge indicates the EVRC2A is charging Battery. Discharge indicates the EVRC2A
has failed in battery load testing.
AC SUPPLY
Status of supplying the external AC
power.
CHARGE
Figure 3-8. Battery Test Section
Status of charging the battery.

DISCHARGE
Status of discharged battery.
BATTERY LOAD TEST
[BATTERY TEST MODE]

LOAD(V) :
25.00
CHARGE(V):
26.50
STATUS :
B-OK C-OK
Push-button for battery load test.

LCD displays during Battery Load Testing.
LOAD(V) : On Test, Battery is disconnected from the
Figure 3-9. Battery Test Mode
charge circuit and connect the battery with load resistor and check the battery. Load
resistor shall be connected with AC supply.
CHARGE[V] : Display the voltage of charge circuit.
STATUS : Display Battery status and charge circuit status.
- B-OK : When the battery voltage is between 21V ~ 28V
- B-HI : When the battery voltage is over 28V
- B-DF : When the battery voltage is between 15V ~ 21V
- B-LO : When the battery voltage is below 15V
- C-OK : When the charge circuit is between 25V ~29V
- C-HI : When the charge circuit is over 29V
- C-LO : When the charge circuit is below 25V
NOTE : All information above is provided by remote mode.
30
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
3.1.8. Menu Control Section

The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) of the EVRC2A displays four lines of twenty characters each.
LCD DISPLAY
4x20 Characters display
CONTROL KEYS
[] [] [] []
Arrow keys are used for moving through the menu window and the changing of the setting value
[] (METER) : Up arrow key is used to move to the meter menu, operable in menu starting mode
[] (AWAKE) : Down arrow key is used for panel awake from sleep mode
[] (EVENT) : Left arrow key is used to move to the event menu, operable in menu starting mode
[] (SET) : Right arrow key is used to move to the setting menu, operable in menu starting mode
[FUN] : To move to main menu when present mode is in starting mode
[ESC] : To cancel for data input mode or return the display to the previous level
[ENT] : To select sub menu or data input
Figure 3-10. Menu Control Section
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
31
[FUN] Key
Press [FUN] key to enter Main menu for displaying information or changing settings. [FUN] key
is also used to display a help message in setting change mode and to cancel the help message
display.
[ESC] Key
The ESC key can be used to cancel data input mode and return to the previous menu.
[ENT] Key
ENT key is used to select a menu by using Up and Down arrow key. Enter key is also used to
accept a new setting by using Up or down arrow key.
[] [] Key
Use the left and right arrow keys to move cursor in the data input mode and change display
message.
[] [] Key
Use Up and Down arrow keys to move through the various menus and to decrease or increase
value in the data input mode.
PORT1
PORT1 is the port to communicate whit an Interface Software. Communication frame between
EVRC2A and a master can be monitored and saved by using DNP Frame Monitor menu of the
Interface Software.
32
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
3.2. LCD Display

y
20 x 4 Character Display(LCD or VFD : Vacuum Fluorescent Display)
All menus are arranged in rotation algorithm.
When cursor is in top menu, if you press [] key, you go to the bottom menu due to Rotation
Menu Algorithm.
Displays Context Help Message.
3.2.1. Main Menu Summary

EVRC2A has 6 Setting Menu BANKs which can be changed individually.
BANK in Primary Setting Menu is applied to System, BANK in Alternate Setting/EditBank
Setting Menu is not applied to System. Press [Alternate Enabled] button and make the lamp on,
Alternate setting Menu is applied to the system. EditBank Setting is used for setting value.
EVRC2A Main Menu consists of 8 sub-menus.
Figure 3-11. Main Menu Tree
3.2.2. Select Setbank

Consists of Primary, Alternate, Edit.
y
Primary : Select BANK to be applied to System.
Alternate : Press [Alternate Enable] button and select a BANK to apply in the system.
Edit : Select a BANK to edit.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
33
3.2.3. Primary Setting

RELAY SETUP
Consists of PASSCODE, COMMUNICATION, CLOCK, EVENT RECORDER, CLEAR
SAVED DATA, FACTORY DEBUG, GAS SENSOR TYPE and TIME SET&DIS TYPE.
SYSTEM SETUP
Consists of CURRENT SENSING, LINE (VS, VL) SENSING, SYSTEM POWER, PANEL
SLEEP TIME, OPTO INPUT SET, OUTPUT RELAY SET, LOOP CONTROL(option) and SET
GROUP CHANGE(option).
PROTECTION
Set items related to protection elements.
MONITORING
Set items related to measurement and maintenance.
SAVE SETTINGS
Save all changed values.
3.2.4. Alternate Setting

The same as PRIMARY SETTING
3.2.5. Editbank Setting

The same as PRIMARY SETTING
3.2.6. Status
OPTO INPUTS : Shows status of External port.
RELAY OUTPUTS : Shows status of Output port.
CLOCK : Shows the present time.
CONTROL TYPE : Shows specs of Hardware.
3.2.7. Metering
It shows metering values. For more details, refer to (see 10. METERING)
34
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
3.2.8. Maintenance
COUNTERS : Shows counters related with SYSTEM.
WEAR MONITOR : Shows any damage Interrupter.
RELAY OUTPUT TEST : Tests External Output port.
POWER QUALITY : Shows counters and time related with supply outage and counters related
with swell, sag and unbalance Option. For more details, refer to (see 11. MAINTENANCE)
3.2.9. Event Recorder

It shows about Event recorder items. For more details, refer to (see 12. EVENT RECORDER).
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
35
[LINE CURRENT(A)]
A:
0 B:
0
C:
0 G:
0
SG:
0 I2:
0
[ZERO SEQ CURRENT]

0 A
0.0 Lag
[POS SEQ CURRENT]

0 A
0.0 Lag
[NEG SEQ CURRENT]
0 A
0.0 Lag
PRIMARY
ALTERNATE
EDITBANK
[SETTING]
>1.RELAY SETUP
2.SYSTEM SETUP
3.PROTECTION
4.MONITORRING
5.SAVE SETTING
[SENSTV CURRENT]
0 A
0.0 Lag
[PHASE C CURRENT]
0 A
0.0 Lag
[GROUND CURRENT]
0 A
0.0 Lag
[PHASE
0
[PHASE
0
[STATUS]
>1.OPTO INPUTS
2.RELAY OUTPUTS
3.CLOCK
4.CONTROL TYPE
A CURRENT]
A
0.0 Lag
B CURRENT]
A
0.0 Lag
RECLOSER CONTROL
EVERC2A-N6
LOOP CONTROL
ENTEC E&E CO. V6.05
[METERING]
>1.CURRENT
2.S-VOLTAGE
3.FREQUENCY
4.SYNCHRO VOLTAGE
5.POWER
6.ENERGY
7.DEMAND
8.SYSTEM
9.L-VOLTAGE
10.UNBALANCE
11.HARMONICS
EVRC2A - CURRENT (A)

A:
0 B:
0
C:
0 G:
0
SG:
0 I2:
0
EVR2A-SYSTEM STATUS
CONTROL : NOPANEL
BREAKER : OPEN
BAT:24.00 GAS:NOGAS
[MAIN MENU]
>1.SELECT SETBANK
2.PRIMARY SETTING
3.ALTERNATE SETTING
4.EDITBANK SETTING
5.STATUS
6.METERING
7.MAINTENANCE
8.EVENT RECORDER
[MAINTENANCE]
>1.COUNTERS
2.WEAR MONITOR
3.OUTPUT RELAY TEST
4.POWER QUALITY
[RELAY SETUP]
>1.PASSCODE
2.COMMUNICATION
3.CLOCK
4.EVENT RECORDER
5.CLEAR SAVED DATA
6.FACTORY DEBUG
7.GAS SENSOR TYPE
8.TIME SET&DIS TYPE
[SYSTEM SETUP]
>1.CURRENT SENSING
2.LINE VS SENSING
3.LINE VL SENSING
4.SYSTEM POWER
5.PANEL SLEEP TIME
6.OPTO INPUT SET
7.OUTPUT RELAY SET
8.LOOP CONTROL
9.SET GROUP CHANGE
10.POWER QUALITY
[PROTECTION]
>1.OPERATION
2.INTERVALS
3.PICKUP CURRENT
4.PHASE FAST
5.PHASE DELAY
6.GROUND FAST
7.GROUND DELAY
8.SEF ELEMENT
9.NEG SEQ FAST
10.NEG SEQ DELAY
11.H/C TRIP-PHA
12.H/C TRIP-GND
13.H/C TRIP-NEQ
14.H/C LOCKOUT-PHA
15.H/C LOCKOUT-GND
16.H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ
17.CLOD LOAD PICKUP
18.DIRECTION
19.VOLTAGE
20.FREQUENCY
21.OTHER ELEMENT
22.USER CURVE SET
23.LOSS OF PHASE
[MONITORING]
>1.DEMAND
2.SYNCHROCHECK
3.TRIP COUNTER
4.RECLOSER WEAR
5.BATTERY TEST
6.FAULT LOCATOR
7.GAS LOW LOCK
8.EXT TRIP&LOCK
9.LIVE LOAD BLOCK
[EVENT RECORDER]
>1.FAULT CYCLE
2.SYSTEM STATUS
3.LOAD PROFILE
4.DIAGNOSTIC
5.FAULT TRIP
6.POWER QUALITY
Figure 3-12. Menu Structure Tree
36
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
[COMMUNICATION]
>1.PROTOCOL SETUP
2.PORT SETUP
3.DIALUP MODEM-1
4.DIALUP MODEM-2
5.EVENT&ETC
[CLEAR SAVED DATA]

>1.Fault Cycle
2.System Status
3.Load Profile
4.Daignostic
5.Max Demand
6.Energy
7.Counter
8.Wear Monitor
9.Fault Trip
10.P-Quality Count
11.P-Quality Event
Event
12.Comm
13.ALL Saved data
[DIRECTION ELEMENT]
>1.PHASE DIRECTION
2.GROUND DIRECTION
3.SEF DIRECTION
4.NEQ DIRECTION
[VOLTAGE]
>1.UNDER VOLTAGE 1
2.UNDER VOLTAGE 2
3.OVER VOLTAGE 1
4.OVER VOLTAGE 2
[USER
>1.USER
2.USER
3.USER
4.USER
CURVE
CURVE
CURVE
CURVE
CURVE
SET]
1
2
3
4
3.3. Using the LCD Menu

Starting mode Screen appears after powering on Control and initializing System.
INITING LOGO
EVRC2A-SYSTEM STATUS
CONTROL : NORMAL
BREAKER : CLOSE
BAT:27.49 GAS: NOGAS
Starting mode Message Display.

Control : Control Status displays
Breaker : Breaker Status displays
Battery : Battery Voltage displays
Gas : Gas Status displays
On Starting mode screen, to see Main Menu, press [FUN] key. Use [] [] key to select submenu. When cursor is in top menu, if you press [] key, you go to the bottom menu due to
Rotation Menu Algorithm.
MAIN MENU
[MAIN MENU]
>1.SELECT SETBANK
>2.PRIMARY SETTING
>3.ALTERNATE SETTING
>4.EDITBANK SETTING
>5.STATUS
>6.METERING
>7.MAINTENANCE
>8.EVENT RECORDER
Main Menu consists of 8 sub-menus.

You can choose any sub-menu by using [] [] key.
Press [ENT] key to select the sub-menu.
As above explanation, you can move and select sub-menu.
3.3.1. View Example

To see External input port status. Move to MAIN MENU / STATUS / OPTO INPUTS.
The following screen is displayed.
STATUS / OPTO INPUTS
[OPTO INPUTS]
>Input 1:
OPEN
>Input 2:
CLOSE
>Input 3:
OPEN
>Input 4:
OPEN
>Input 5:
OPEN
>Input 6:
OPEN
>Input 7:
OPEN
>Input 8:
CLOSE
>Door st:
CLOSE
OPEN : Shows External Input is de-asserted,

CLOSE : Shows External Input is asserted.
Only 4 lines are displayed on LCD Screen, use [] [] key to see next
lines.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
37
3.3.2. Setting Example

Step to change Phase Pickup current of protection elements in Primary setting.
1) Move to PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / PHASE.
A following screen is displayed.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / PHASE
[PICKUP CURRENT A]
>Phase:
500
Ground:
250
S.E.F:
OFF
Range
OFF, 10 ~ 1600
Default 500
Step
1A
Set the pickup current of Phase Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent Elements.
2) As above screen, to move to Phase, use [] [] key and press [ENT] key to move into
value column.
3) Use [] [] keys and [] [] keys to change a new value.
Press [ENT] key and then you can see the changed Phase value.
NOTE: You must save all changed values at Setting Save menu.
3.3.3. Help Function

Help function displays the detail requirements for the setting.
User can check the detail requirements of a setting after selecting the setting item by pressing
[FUN] key.
Help Message
Pick up current - ph
>Phase:
500
Ground:
250
S.E.F:
OFF
38
Help Message :
Pickup current - phase (OFF,10~1600A)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
3.3.4. Setting Save

To save all changed values, steps are as follows;
Move to PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / SAVE SETTINGS and
follow each step as below.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / SAVE SETTINGS
1) Type Passcode and press [ENT] key

ENTER PASSCODE
0000
2) If Passcode is correct, screen (Left) appears; otherwise screen

(Left) appears again.
SETTING VALUE SAVE

<ENT>:SETTING SAVE
3) If screen appears, press [ENT] key to save changed value.

NOTE :
The changed setting can be effective after it is saved.
SAVE SETTING
If the save procedure is canceled, the setting keeps previous

value.
However, by EVRC2A version 5.30, if a setting related with
communication is changed and then saved, the changed setting is
applied after rebooting.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
39
4. SELECT SETBANK
There were only Primary and Alternative banks before version 4.40 and 4 more banks added
since version 4.40.
EVRC2A has 6 setting banks and the user can have 6 different sets depending on Distribution
circumstance.
SELECT SETBANK / PRIMARY
[SELECT SETBANK]
>Primary:
BANK1
>Alternate:
BANK2
>Edit:
BANK3
Range
BANK1 ~ 6
Default BANK1
Step
Step
Step
Set Primary for BANK1.
SELECT SETBANK / ALTERNATE

[SELECT SETBANK]
>Primary:
BANK1
>Alternate:
BANK2
>Edit:
BANK3
Range
BANK1 ~ 6
Default BANK2
Set Alternate for BANK2.
SELECT SETBANK / EDIT

[SELECT SETBANK]
>Primary:
BANK1
>Alternate:
BANK2
>Edit:
BANK3
Range
BANK1 ~ 6
Default BANK3
Set Edit for BANK3.
40
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
5. RELAY SETUP
Relay set shall be set independently for each bank. However, from version 4.41, regardless of
bank, it will be applied to all other banks if it is set in a bank.
Sets following items for Relay
y
Passcode
Communication
Clock
Event Recorder
Clear Saved Data
Factory Debug
Gas Sensor Type
Time SET&DIS Type

NOTE : According to a recloser type, there may be no Gas Sensor Type.
5.1. Passcode
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / PASSCODE
[PASSCODE CHANGE]
ENTER PASSCODE
0000
[PASSCODE CHANGE]
ENTER NEW PASSCODE
0000
[PASSCODE CHANGE]
ENTER NEW PASSCODE
0000
PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE
y Press PASSCODE to store changed value.

y PASSCODE has 4 digits.
y Passcode change procedure is as follows;
Enter the old PASSCODE, and press [ENT] key.
Enter new PASSCODE, and press [ENT] key.
To change and store PASSCODE, enter, [ENT] key.
After changing PASSCODE, new PASSCODE will be displayed.
[PASSCODE CHANGE]
ENTER NEW PASSCODE
0000
PASSCODE SAVED: 0000
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
41
5.2. Communication
5.2.1. Overview
EVRC2A has four ports for communication.
The EVRC2A has the front panel RS232 port, the side panel RS232 port, the side panel RS485
port(or RS232 port) and the side panel Ethernet port.
Communication port settings are available as follows in Table 5-1. Communication Ports
setting of EVRC2A.
Table 5-1. Communication Ports setting of EVRC2A
Port
Speed
Parity bit
Data bit
Stop bit
PORT1 RS-232
57600 bps
No parity
User Interface Front Panel
PORT2 RS-232
1200 - 19200 bps
No parity
User Interface Side Panel
1200 - 19200 bps
No parity
PORT3
Type
RS-485
or RS-232
PORT4 RJ45
10BASE-T/100BASE-T
Location
PORT1(RS232)
A port to interface with Interface Software.
PORT2(RS232) Option
The Port2 is a port for a serial communication for MODBUS, DNP3.0 or IEC60870-5-101
protocol. A user can select the protocol and configure the Port2 for the selected protocol by
changing baud rate and/or other settings for the Port2.
PORT3(RS485 or RS232) Option
The Port3 is a port for a serial communication for MODBUS, DNP3.0 or IEC60870-5-101
protocol. A user can select the protocol and configure the Port3 for the selected protocol by
changing baud rate and/or other settings for the Port3.
The Port3 type of EVRC2A-N is a fixed RS485 port. However, the Port3 type of EVRC2A can
be selected as RS485 or RS232 by a user. In order to use RS485 port for EVRC2A, the Pin4 and
Pin5 of RS485 should be connected.
42
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PORT4(RJ-45) Option
The Port4 is a Ethernet port for TCP/IP communication (10 BASE-T /100 BASE-T speed) for
Modbus, IEC60870-5-104 or DNP3.0 Protocol. A user can select the protocol and configure the
Port4 for the selected protocol by changing its settings.
NOTE: From EVRC2A version 5.30, if a setting related with communication is changed and
then saved, the changed setting is applied after rebooting.
During IEC60870-5-104 or DNP3.0 communication through Port2, Port3 or Port 4, a user can
connect with the Interface Software ETIMS(ENTEC Integration Management Software) and
use it.
Please refer to DNP3.0 Protocol Technical Manual, MODBUS Protocol Technical Manual
or IEC60870-5-101/-104 Protocol Technical Manual for more information about setting for
each protocol.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
43
5.2.2. Protocol Setup

5.2.2.1. DNP 3.0 Protocol - Option
EVRC2A can be programmed for communication using the DNP 3.0 through communication
port2, port3 or port4. For details, refer to DNP3.0 Protocol Technical Manual
Move to PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP /
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 to select setting for DNP 3.0
Protocol.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Function
[DNP3.0-1]
>Function:
ENABLE
Use Port:
P2-232
Master Addr: 60000
DISABLE, ENABLE
Range
Default DISABLE
Step
Select whether to use DNP3.0 Protocol or not.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Use Port

[DNP3.0-1]
>Function:
ENABLE
>Use Port:
P2-232
>Master Addr: 60000
P2-232, P3-232, P3-485, P4-TCP
Range
Default
DNP1 : P2-232
DNP2 : P3-232
Step
Select DNP3 communication port.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Master Address

[DNP3.0-1]
>Master Addr: 60000
>Slave Addr:
1
>D/L Confirm:
SOME
0 ~ 65519
Range
Default 60000
Step
Enter the master station address.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Slave Address

[DNP3.0-1]
>Master Addr: 60000
>Slave Addr:
1
>D/L Confirm:
SOME
0 ~ 65519
Range
Default
DNP1 : 1
DNP2 : 2
Step
Enter the slave(EVRC2A) address.
44
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / D/L Confirm

[DNP3.0-1]
>D/L Confirm:
SOME
>D/L Retries:
2
>D/L Timeout:
55
NO, YES, SOME
Range
Default SOME
Step
Choose whether Data Link Confirm is used or not.

NO : Data Link Confirm is not used.
YES : Data Link Confirm is used.
SOME : Data Link Confirm is used in case of Multi-frame.
When Data Link Confirm use-setting, it shall be set as Host setting. If
the setting is different from Host setting, the communication may be
failed due to Data Link Reset.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / D/L Retries

[DNP3.0-1]
>D/L Confirm:
SOME
>D/L Retries:
2
>D/L Timeout:
55
0 ~ 255
Range
Default 2
Step
Enter the number of retries that will be issued for a given data link
layer.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / D/L Timeout

[DNP3.0-1]
>D/L Confirm:
SOME
>D/L Retries:
2
>D/L Timeout:
55
1 ~ 255 sec
Range
Default 55
Step
1 sec
Set a waiting time between Data Link Frame transfer till to receive
Data Link Confirm(ACK) of Master. If there is no Data Link Confirm
receiving and Data Link retry is available, EVRC2A will send Data
Link Frame again.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / A/L Retries

[DNP3.0-1]
>D/L Retries:
>D/L Timeout:
>A/L Retries:
0~ 255
Range
2
55
1
Default 1
Step
Select the number of retries that will be issued for a given application
link layer.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
45
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / A/L Timeout

[DNP3.0-1]
D/L Timeout:
A/L Retries:
>A/L Timeout:
Range
55
1
55
1 ~ 255 sec
Default 55
Step
1 sec
Set a waiting time for Slave Application to receive A/L Confirm(ACK)

from Master Application, in case that Confirm is requested during Data
transfer from Slave Application to Master Application.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / SBO Time

[DNP3.0-1]
A/L Retries:
A/L Timeout:
>SBO Time:
Range
1
55
15
1 ~ 255 sec
Default 15 sec
Step
1 sec
Set a time interval between Select Function and Operate Function. If no

operation command during set time, Select command is cancelled.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Multi Inter

[DNP3.0-1]
>A/L Timeout:
55
>SBO Time:
15
>Multi Inter:
0.10
Range
0.01 ~ 300.00 sec
Default 0.10
Step
0.01 sec
Enter a time delay between frames when Multi-frame replies.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Tx Delay

[DNP3.0]
>DNP Address:
>Multi Inter:
>Tx Delay :
Range
1
0.10
0.05
0.00(OFF), 0.01 ~ 300.00 sec
Default 0.05
Step
0.01 sec
Delay time of sending Real data after RTS Signal is on.

NOTE : The setting does not apply to communication and is not
indicated from Ver 7.07 of EVRC2A_NT.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / PowUp Unsol

[DNP3.0-1]
>Multi Inter:
0.10
>Tx Delay :
0.05
>PowUpUnsol: ENABLE
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default ENABLE
Step
Select the unsolicited mode.

Enable : Unsolicited response is transmitted.
Disable : Unsolicited response is not transmitted.
46
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Unsol Time

[DNP3.0-1]
>Multi Inter:
0.10
>PowUpUnsol: ENABLE
>Unsol Time:
5
Range
0 ~ 255 sec
Default 5
Step
1 sec
Set a delay time of transmission of event data after the last event
occurs.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Unsol Type

[DNP3.0-1]
>PowUpUnsol: ENABLE
>Unsol Time:
5
>Unsol Type: NOTRIG
Range
NOTRIG, PERIOD
Default NOTRIG
Step
Set a type to configure a method to send event data.

NOTRIG : If there is no more event occurrence during setting Unsol
Time after the last event occurs, the event data is transmitted.
PERIOD : Unsolicited message is sent to a master with whole event
data occurring after setting Unsol Time starting and elapsing when
the first event occurs.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Class 1

[DNP3.0-1]
>Class 1:
DISABLE
Class 2:
DISABLE
>Class 3:
DISABLE
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
Select the unsolicited response mode of Class 1 events.

[DNP3.0-1]
>Class 1:
DISABLE
>Class 2:
DISABLE
>Class 3:
DISABLE
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step

[DNP3.0-1]
Class 1:
DISABLE
Class 2:
DISABLE
>Class 3:
DISABLE
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
47
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Master IP Oct 1~4

[DNP3.0-1]
>Master IP Oct1: 192
>Master IP Oct2: 168
>Master IP Oct3:
7
>Master IP Oct4:
2
Range
0 ~ 255
Default ~
Step
Select the IP Address for DNP3 Communication.

IP Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx
IP Addr1,2,3,4 is ,,,
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / TCP/UDP Select
[DNP3.0-1]
>TCP/UDP Select: TCP
>TCP Port:
20000
>UDP Port:
20000
Range
TCP, UDP
Default TCP
Step
Select TCP or UDT communication at the use of Port4(Ethernet).
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / TCP Port

[DNP3.0-1]
>TCP Port:
20000
>UDP Port:
20000
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default 20000
Step
Set the TCP/IP port number of EVRC2A for TCP communication.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / UDP Port

[DNP3.0-1]
>TCP Port:
20000
>UDP Port:
20000
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default 20000
Step
Set the TCP/IP port number of EVRC2A for UDP communication.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Keep Alive Check Time

[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>UDP Port:
20000
>K-Alv Check Tm: 10
>Fragment Size: 2048
Range
0(OFF), 1 ~ 600 sec
Default 10
Step
1sec
Set the Time period that checks the communication connecting status
during the idle status.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Fragment Size

[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>UDP Port:
20000
>K-Alv Check Tm: 10
48
Range
64 ~ 2048
Default 2048
Step
Set the size of DNP3.0 fragment.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Time Req(m)

[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>K-Alv Check Tm: 10
>Time Req(m):
1440
0(OFF), 1 ~ 30000 min
Range
Default 1440
Step
1 min
Set Time Sync in order to synchronize internal system clock with time
received from master station.
NOTE : The setting is supported from Ver 7.04 of EVRC2A_NT.
5.2.2.2. IEC60870-5-101 Protocol - Option

EVRC2A can be programmed for communication using the IEC60870-5-101 through
communication port2 or port3.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / IEC60870-5-101 to select setting for IEC608705-101 Protocol.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Function
DISABLE, ENABLE
Range
[IEC60870-5-101]
>Function:
DISABLE
>Use Port:
P2-232
>Link Addr:
1
Default DISABLE
Step
Select whether to use IEC60870-5-101 protocol.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Use Port

[IEC60870-5-101]
>Function:
DISABLE
>Use Port
P2-232
>Link Addr:
1
P2-232, P3-232, P3-485
Range
Default P2-232
Step
Select a port to use IEC60870-5-101 communication.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Link Address

[IEC60870-5-101]
>Function:
DISABLE
>Use Port:
P2-232
>Link Addr:
1
0 ~ 65535
Range
Default 1
Step
Enter the slave(EVRC2A) address for IEC60870-5-101 communication.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
49
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ ASDU Addr

[IEC60870-5-101]
>ASDU Addr:
1
>Cyclic Period:
60
>Event Period:
15
Range
0~65535
Default 1
Step
Select the Application Service Data Unit Address.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Cyclic Period

[IEC60870-5-101]
>ASDU Addr:
1
>Cyclic Period:
60
>Event Period:
15
Range
1~60000 sec
Default 60
Step
1 sec
Select the Cyclic Period.

It is to set interval time between Point set for Cyclic.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Event Period

[IEC60870-5-101]
>ASDU Addr:
1
>Cyclic Period:
60
>Event Period:
15
Range
0~255 sec
Default 15
Step
1sec
Select the delay time before events are sent. Single event or several
events occur and then if new event is not generated during the delay
time, the event(s) already generated is(are) sent to a Master.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Retries

[IEC60870-5-101]
>Retries:
0
Conf.Timeout:
10
>Max Poll Time:
10
Range
0 ~ 255
Default 0
Step
Set the Data retires number.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Conf. Timeout

[IEC60870-5-101]
>Retries:
0
>Conf.Timeout:
10
>Max Poll Time:
10
Range
1 ~ 255 sec
Default 15
Step
1 sec
Set the wait time till receive the Data Confirm (ACK) of master after
transferring the Data. If there isnt the Confirm during this setting time
and Data retries is available, EVRC2A transfers the Data again.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Max Poll Tim

[IEC60870-5-101]
>Retries:
0
>Conf.Timeout:
10
>Max Poll Time:
10
Range
1 ~ 255 sec
Default 60
Step
Set the Data Polling period time.
50
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
1 sec
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ ADSU Addr Size*

[IEC60870-5-101]
>ADSU Addr Size:
2
>Link Confirm:ALWAYS
>ADSU Addr Size:
2
Range
1~2
Default 2
Step
Enter the size of cause of transmission.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Link Confirm*

[IEC60870-5-101]
>ADSU Addr Size:
2
>Link Confirm:ALWAYS
>Link Addr Size:
1
Range
NEVER, ALWAYS
Default ALWAYS
Step
Enter the Link layer confirm mode.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Link Addr Size*

[IEC60870-5-101]
>Link Addr Size:
1
>Rx Frame Size: 261
>Link Addr Size:
1
Range
1~2
Default 1
Step
Enter the size of link address.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Rx Frame Size*

[IEC60870-5-101]
>Link Addr Size:
1
>Rx Frame Size: 261
>Rx Frame TO :
15
Range
0 ~ 261
Default 261
Step
Enter the maximum size of received frame.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Rx Frame TO*

[IEC60870-5-101]
>Rx Frame Size: 261
>Rx Frame TO :
15
>Tx Frame Size: 261
Range
0(OFF), 1 ~ 255 sec
Default 15
Step
1 sec
Enter the maximum amount of time to wait for a complete frame after
receiving the frame sync.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Tx Frame Size*

[IEC60870-5-101]
>Tx Frame Size: 261
>COT Size :
1
>IOA Size :
2
Range
0 ~ 261
Default 261
Step
Enter the maximum size of transmitted frame.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
51
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ COT Size*

[IEC60870-5-101]
>COT Size :
1
>IOA Size :
2
>One Ch Response: NO
Range
1~2
Default 1
Step
Enter the size of cause of transmission.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ IOA Size*

[IEC60870-5-101]
>COT Size :
1
>IOA Size :
2
Range
1~3
Default 2
Step
Enter the size of information object address.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ One Ch Response*

[IEC60870-5-101]
>Frame Repet TO: 30
>Select Timeout:
5
Range
NO, YES
Default NO
Step
This allows to send one character response instead of a fixed length

NACK when no response data available.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Fram Repet TO*

[IEC60870-5-101]
>Frame Repet TO: 30
>Select Timeout:
5
Range
0(OFF), 1~255sec
Default 30
Step
1 sec
Enter the time out for repetition of frames(or incremental application

layer timeout).
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101 / Select Timeout*

[IEC60870-5-101]
>Select Timeout:
5
>CMD Termination:YES
>CSE Termination:YES
Range
0(OFF), 1~255
Default 5
Step
Enter the period after a previously received select will timeout.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ CMD Termination*

[IEC60870-5-101]
>Select Timeout:
5
Range
NO, YES
Default YES
Step
Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of

commands other than set point commands.
52
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ CSE Termination*

[IEC60870-5-101]
>Clock Sync Evt:YES
Range
NO, YES
Default YES
Step
Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of set

point commands.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Clock Sync Evt*

[IEC60870-5-101]
>Clock Sync Evt:YES
Range
NO, YES
Default YES
Step
Select whether to generate spontaneous clock synchronization events
NOTE : The above set values marked with * are indicated from Ver 7.06 of EVRC2A_NT.
5.2.2.3. IEC60870-5-104 Protocol - Option

EVRC2A can be programmed for communication using the IEC60870-5-104 through
communication port4.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / IEC60870-5-104 to select setting for IEC608705-104 Protocol.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ Function
Range
[IEC60870-5-104]
>Function:
DISABLE
>ASDU Addr:
1
>Cyclic Period:
60
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
Select whether to use IEC60870-5-104 protocol or not.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ ASDU Addr

[IEC60870-5-104]
>Function:
DISABLE
>ASDU Addr:
1
>Cyclic Period:
60
Range
0~65535
Default 1
Step
Select the Application Service Data Unit Address.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
53
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ Cyclic Period

[IEC60870-5-104]
>Function:
DISABLE
>ASDU Addr:
1
>Cyclic Period:
60
1~60000 sec
Range
Default 60
Step
1 sec
Select the Cyclic Period.

It is to set interval time between Point set for Cyclic.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ Time Out(t0)

[IEC60870-5-104]
>Time Out(t0):
120
>Time Out(t1):
15
>Time Out(t2):
10
1~255 sec
Range
Default 120
Step
1sec
Select the Timeout for connection establishment.

[IEC60870-5-104]
>Time Out(t0):
120
>Time Out(t1):
15
>Time Out(t2):
10
1~255 sec
Range
Default 15
Step
1sec
Select the Timeout for send or test APDUs.

[IEC60870-5-104]
>Time Out(t0):
120
>Time Out(t1):
15
>Time Out(t2):
10
1~255 sec
Range
Default 10
Step
1sec
Select the Timeout for acknowledgements in case of no data message

( t2<t1).

[IEC60870-5-104]
>Time Out(t1):
15
>Time Out(t2):
10
>Time Out(t3):
20
Range
1~255 sec
Default 20
Step
1sec
Select the Timeout for sending test frame in case of a long idle state.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ Event Period

[IEC60870-5-104]
>Time Out(t2):
10
>Time Out(t3):
20
>Event Period:
5
Range
0~255 sec
Default 5
Step
Select the delay time before events are sent. Single event or several
events occur and then if new event is not generated during the delay
time, the event(s) already generated is(are) sent to a Master.
54
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ TCP Port

Range
[IEC60870-5-104]
>Time Out(t3):
20
>Event Period:
5
>TCP Port:
2404
0 ~ 65535
Default 2404
Step
Set the TCP/IP Port of EVRC2A for IEC60870-5-104 Protocol

communication.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Rx Frame Size*

[IEC60870-5-104]
>Rx Frame Size: 255
>Tx Frame Size: 255
>Select Timeout:
5
Range
0 ~ 255
Default 255
Step
Enter the maximum size of received frame.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Tx Frame Size*

[IEC60870-5-104]
>Rx Frame Size: 255
>Tx Frame Size: 255
>Select Timeout:
5
Range
0 ~ 255
Default 255
Step
Enter the maximum size of transmitted frame.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104 / Select Timeout*

[IEC60870-5-101]
>Select Timeout:
5
Range
0(OFF), 1~255
Default 5
Step
Enter the period after a previously received select will timeout.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ CMD Termination*

[IEC60870-5-101]
>Select Timeout:
5
Range
NO, YES
Default YES
Step
Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of

commands other than set point commands.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ CSE Termination*

[IEC60870-5-101]
>Clock Sync Evt:YES
Range
NO, YES
Default YES
Step
Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of set

point commands.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
55
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Clock Sync Evt*

[IEC60870-5-101]
>Clock Sync Evt:YES
Range
NO, YES
Default YES
Step
Select whether to generate spontaneous clock synchronization events
5.2.2.4. MODBUS Protocol - Option

EVRC2A can be programmed for communication using the MODBUS through communication
port2, port3 or port4. For details, refer to MODBUS Protocol Technical Manual
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / MODBUS to select setting for MODBUS
Protocol.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ Function
Range
[MODBUS]
>Function:
DISABLE
Use Port:
P3-485
>Slave Addr:
1
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
Set whether to use MODBUS communication or not.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ Use Port

[MODBUS]
>Function:
DISABLE
>Use Port:
P3-485
>Slave Address:
1
Range
P2-232, P3-232, P3-485, P4-TCP
Default P4-TCP
Step
Select MODBUS communication port.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ Slave Address

[MODBUS]
>Function:
DISABLE
>Use Port:
P3-485
>Slave Address:
1
Range
1 ~ 254
Default 1
Step
Enter the Modbus address.
56
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ Slave Tx Delay

[MODBUS]
>Slave Address:
1
>Tx Delay:
0.005
Range
0.000 ~ 0.500 sec
Default 0.005
Step
0.001 sec
Delay time of sending Real data from RTS Signal is on.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ TCP/UDP Select

[MODBUS]
>TCP Port:
502
>UDP Port:
502
Range
TCP, UDP
Default TCP
Step
Select TCP or UDT communication at the use of Port4(Ethernet).
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ TCP Port

[MODBUS]
>TCP Port:
502
>UDP Port:
502
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default 502
Step
Set the TCP/IP port number of EVRC2A for TCP communication.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ UDP Port

[MODBUS]
>TCP Port:
502
>UDP Port:
502
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default 502
Step
Set the TCP/IP port number of EVRC2A for UDP communication.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
57
5.2.3. Port Setup

5.2.3.1. PORT2-RS232
EVRC2A side panel PORT2 and related elements are set.
Move to PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT
SETUP/ PORT2-RS232 to select setting for PORT2.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1-RS232/ Line Speed
[PORT1-RS232]
>Line Speed:
19200
>Parity Bit:
NONE
>Data Bit:
8
Range
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps
Default 19200
Step
Select the baud rate for PORT2.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1-RS232/ Parity Bit*

[PORT1-RS232]
>Parity Bit:
NONE
>Data Bit:
8
>Stop Bit:
1
Range
NONE, ODD, EVEN
Default NONE
Step
Select whether to use Parity Bit.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1-RS232/ Data Bit*

[PORT1-RS232]
>Parity Bit:
NONE
>Data Bit:
8
>Stop Bit:
1
Range
7, 8
Default 8
Step
Select the Data Bit.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1-RS232/ Stop Bit*

[PORT1-RS232]
>Parity Bit:
NONE
>Data Bit:
8
>Stop Bit:
1
Range
1, 2
Default 1
Step
Select the Stop Bit.
58
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ Line Type

[PORT1-RS232]
>Stop Bit:
1
>Line Type:
4-WIRE
>CTS Function:
ON
Range
DIALUP, 2-WIRE, 4-WIRE
Default 4-WIRE
Step
Select a modem for communication.

DIALUP : Dial-Up modem1 is used.
2-WIRE : 2-wire private line is used and continuously Carrier is
monitored to control data flow by DCD(Data Carrier Detect).
4-WIRE : 4-wire private line is used and RTS(Request To Send) and
CTS(clear to Send) signal are used to control data flow.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ CTS Function

[PORT1-RS232]
>Line Speed:
19200
>Line Type: 4-WIRE
>CTS Function:
ON
Range
OFF, ON
Default ON
Step
Select whether to use CTS signal or not.

OFF : Regardless of CTS signal, transfer a data.
ON : After confirming CTS signal is Asserted, transfer a data.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ DCD Function

[PORT1-RS232]
>CTS Function:
ON
>DCD Function:
OFF
>RTS Function: AUTO
Range
OFF, ON
Default OFF
Step
Set whether to use DCD signal or not.

OFF : Regardless of DCD signal, transfer a data.
ON : After confirming DCD signal is Asserted, transfer a data.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ RTS Function

[PORT1-RS232]
>CTS Function:
ON
>DCD Function:
OFF
>RTS Function: AUTO
Range
OFF, ON, AUTO
Default AUTO
Step
Set whether to use RTS signal and the mode or not.

OFF : RTS signal of EVRC2A is always OFF(Deassert).
ON : RTS signal of EVRC2A is always ON(Assert).
AUTO : On requesting data transfer to Modem, after RTS signal of
EVRC2A is on and after data transfer completion, RTS signal of
EVRC2A is off.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
59
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ CTS Chk Out

[PORT1-RS232]
>CTS Chk Out:
5
>DCD Timeout:
5000
>TX Post Dly:
50
Range
1 ~ 255 sec
Default 5
Step
1 sec
Set a waiting time that waits CTS signal after RTS signal is ON. In case
of radio communication system, when transfer data at the same time
from various Slave, it produces transmission permission delay time due
to the wireless network traffic congestion. By this setting, try the
transmission with high RTS during checkout time.
It is available if CTS Function setting is ON.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ DCD Timeout

[PORT1-RS232]
>CTS Chk Out:
5
>DCD Timeout:
5000
>TX Post Dly:
50
Range
0 ~ 60000 msec
Default 5000
Step
1 msec
Set a delay time for checking DCD signal which determines modem
status before sending RTS signal in 2-wire communication type. If
DCD signal is ON, EVRC2A does not transfer the data and treat it as
DCD Fail after the set time. It is available if DCD Function setting is
ON.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ TX Post Delay

[PROT1-RS232]
>CTS CheckOut:
5
>DCD Timeout:
5000
>TX Post Dly:
50
Range
0 ~ 60000 msec
Default 50
Step
1 msec
Set the delay time of RTS OFF after data transmission.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ TX Pre Delay

[PORT1-RS232]
>DCD Timeout:
5000
>TX Post Dly:
50
>TX Pre Dly:
50
Range
0 ~ 60000 msec
Default 5
Step
1 msec
Set the delay time of starting transmission after CTS signal is received.
60
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
5.2.3.2. PORT3-RS232/485
SETUP/ POR3-232/485 to select setting for PORT3.
The setting item of this menu is same as PORT2-RS232. Refer to 5.2.3.1. PORT2-RS232.
5.2.3.3. PORT4-TCP/IP
SETUP/ POR4-TCP/IP to select setting for PORT4.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP / IP Addr1 ~ 4
[PORT4-TCP/IP]
>IP Addr1:
IP Addr2:
IP Addr3:
>IP Addr4:
Range
0 ~ 255
Default ~
0
0
0
0
Step
Select the IP Address for EVRC2A.

IP Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx
IP Addr1,2,3,4 is ,,,
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP / Gateway Addr1 ~ 4
[PORT4-TCP/IP]
>Gateway Addr1:
Gateway Addr2:
Gateway Addr3:
>Gateway Addr4:
Range
0
0
0
0
0 ~ 255
Default ~
Step
Select the Gateway Address.

Gateway Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx
Gateway Addr1,2,3,4 is ,,,

COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP / SubnetMask
[PORT4-TCP/IP]
>Gateway Oct3:
0
>Gateway Oct4:
0
>S/M:255.255.255.000
Range
255.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.255
Default 255.255.255.000
Step
Select the Subnet Mask Address for EVRC2A.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
61
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP /K- Alv Function

Range
[PORT4-TCP/IP]
>K-Alv Func:DISABLE
>K-Alv Idle T:
4
>K-Alv Interval: 2
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
Select whether to use the Ethernet communication connecting status

check function or not.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP / K-Alv Idle T

Range
[PORT4-TCP/IP]
>K-Alv Func:DISABLE
>K-Alv Idle T:
4
>K-Alv Interval: 2
1 ~ 255 sec
Default 4
Step
1sec
If Idle status is maintained during the setting time, check the

communication connecting maintainance status.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP / K-Alv Interval

Range
[PORT4-TCP/IP]
>K-Alv Func:DISABLE
>K-Alv Idle T:
4
>K-Alv Interval: 2
1 ~ 255 sec
Default 2
Step
1sec
After checking the communication connecting status, check the status

again if there isnt any reply during the setting time.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP / K-Alv Retry

Range
[PORT4-TCP/IP]
>K-Alv Idle T:
>K-Alv Interval:
>K-Alv Retry:
4
2
1
1 ~ 255
Default 1
Step
Check the communication connecting maintainance status as much as

the setting number. If there isnt a respond, take as communication fail
and close the communication connection.
62
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
5.2.4. RTU Communication Setup (DIALUP MODEM) - Option

EVRC2A can support dial-up modem communication, Hayes-compatible, through Port2 and
Port3 when their port types are both RS232.
The configuration of the Port2 for use of dial-up modem can be set on the menu DIALUP
MODEM-1. For the configuration of the Port3, it can be set on the menu DIALUP MODEM2. Refer to 5.2.4.4. Dialup Modem Setup for more information about the configuration of
Port2 and Port3 for the dial-up modem communication.
5.2.4.1. Configure modem with AT commands

Before using Modem connected with EVRC2A, following setting shall be confirmed.
Configure port speed(must be done)
Set DNP communication speed the same as the speed between EVRC2A and Modem, and set
DNP communication speed slower than the speed between modems.
Configure answer mode(frequently)
The modem will answer an incoming call on the second ring using the command ATS0=2.
Configure Data Carrier Detect(must be done)
Data Carrier Detect should follow the presence or absence of a calling modem.
The AT command is AT&C1.
Configure Data Terminal Ready(must be done)
Data Terminal Ready should control the modem. If DTR is high, the modem is ready to receive
calls. If DTR is low, the modem should not receive any more calls and should hang up any
existing call.
The AT command is AT&D2.
Configure Data Set Ready(must be done)
Data Set Ready should verify the modem. DSR is always ON.
The AT command is AT&S0.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
63
Configure no CONNECT messages(must be done)

A Hayes AT-style modem usually outputs a message when a call is received. For example:
CONNECT 9600
The modem has a "quiet mode" that disables these messages.
The AT command is ATQ1. There will be no OK printed in response to this command.
Configure no echo of commands(must be done)
Echoing commands can confuse the console, so turn off command echoing.
The AT command is ATE0.
Configure silent connection(must be done)
Most modems have a speaker. By default this is connected whilst a modem is connecting and
negotiating a common protocol and speed. This is very useful for a dialing modem, as it prevents
a human being accidentally repeatedly called. The speaker can be annoying on answering
modems.
The AT command is ATM1.
5.2.4.2. Operation functions when to use Dialing Modem

Transmitting a Communication Packet
y
Checks DCD is asserted(Check Online)
The Communication packet is transmitted
. Dial when DCD is Deassert
Receiving a Communication Packet

y
Checks DCD is asserted(Check Online)
The Communication packet is received
. if DCD is Deassert, receiving is not working.
Dialing
y
The user should insert an order for Reset.
Wait 0.5 second
Make a phone call by using Dialing String and Dialing Number.
Checks DCD is Asserted
. Dial connection waiting time is depending on Data Link Timeout set by the user.
64
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Hang up
y
DTR Line is deasserted
Wait 2 second
DTR Line is asserted
Wait 2 second
. EVRC2A will hang up the modem after a delay of 30 seconds with no valid packet received or
transmitted.
5.2.4.3. Short Message Service (SMS) Support - Option

SMS function is provided for communication based on the dialing modem to send messages of
significant events occurrences to the phones or other communication devices whose phone
numbers are assigned to EVRC2A for SMS function by the Interface Software.
Maximum 5 phone numbers are able to be assigned for receiving SMS and maximum 6 events
on a signal message per one phone number can be sent at a time. The total maximum events for
each a phone number are 48 events.
Following information are included in a single message for SMS.
Device Name:
This is the device name sending a short message.
Point index Description:
This point index description to indicate which event occurs is described with maximum 5
characters and it is the same with the point index used for DNP. In order to figure out what this
description means, see the DNP point table.
Point Index Value:
This indicates the current status value of the point where an event occurs.
The current SMS function supports to send a message only for Binary Input event.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
65
5.2.4.4. Dialup Modem Setup

Calling String
In order to set Calling String, go to PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING /
RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM-1 or DIALUP MODEM-2 /
CALLING STRING.
COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM / CALLING STRING
Select a proper dial string in accordance with communication
[CALLING STRING]
ATDT
circumstance (Master or Switchboard dial method).

ATD : Default Dial
ATDT : Tone Dial Type(Already set in modem(Default Dial type)
ATDP : Pulse Dial
[NEW CALLING STRING]

ATDT
At , Insert Calling String which a user wants.
PRESS ENTER TO SAVE
1) In order to change each alphabet(A~Z, space), use [], [] button,

ATDT
!!! SAVE OK !!!
use [], [] button to move cursor.

2) Push the [ENT] button after Calling String is changed, then is
shown.

ATDT
If [ENT] button is pushed at , then Calling String is changed.

Change of setting is completed and then is shown.
!!! SAVE ABORT !!!
If the [ESC] button is pushed at , is shown, but changed setting is

not applied yet.
NOTE: The changed setting is effective after it is saved at
*.SAVE SETTING menu.
66
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Calling Number
In order to set Calling Number, go to PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING /
RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM-1 or DIALUP MODEM-2 /
CALLING NUMBER menu.
COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM / CALLING NUMBER
Insert [Modem(Master station) phone number] for calling.
[CALLING NUMBER]
Total 16 numbers can be inputted. If numbers under 16 are inputted, the
0000000000000000
rest should be inputted with X.

Insert Calling Number which a user wants at .
[NEW CALLING NUMBER]

0000000000000000
PRESS ENTER TO SAVE
1) Use [], [] button to change each number(0~9, X) and use [],

[] button to move a cursor.
2) Press [ENT] button after changing and then is shown.

0000000000000XXX
!!! SAVE OK !!!
Calling Number is changed if [ENT] button is pushed. Changing

setting is completed and then is shown.

0000000000000XXX

not applied yet.
!!! SAVE ABORT !!!
NOTE : The changed setting is effective after it is saved at

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
67
Initial String
In order to set Initial String, PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY
SETUP / COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM-1 or DIALUP MODEM-2/ INITIAL
STRING menu.
COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM / INITIAL STRING
Modem can be initialized by inserting total 30 figures of number,
[INITIAL STRING]
ATQ1E0M1&C1&D2S0=1
<AT+FCLASS=0
>
<
>
character, space or special character.

EVRC2A should be reset before making a phone call(connection).
Continuous double Space or / shall ignore next String.
[NEW INITIAL STRING]

AT+FCLASS=0
PRESS ENTER TO SAVE
Insert Initial String which a user wants on .

1) Use [], [] button to change each number, alphabet, space or
special character and use [], [] button to move a cursor.
2) Press [ENT] button after changing and then is shown.

AT+FCLASS=0
!!! SAVE OK !!!
NOTE : continuous double spaces or the character next to \ is

ignored.

AT+FCLASS=0
Initial String is changed if [ENT] button is pushed. Changing setting

is completed and then is shown.
!!! SAVE ABORT !!!

not applied yet.
NOTE : The changed setting is effective after it is saved at

68
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Connect Parameter
COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM-1 or DIALUP MODEM-2 / CONNECT PARAM.
COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM / CONNET PARAM / Cmd Res TO
Range
[CONNECT PARAMETER]
>Cmd Res TO:
2
>Connect TO:
30
>Idle Time:
60
0 ~ 255 sec
Default 2
Step
1 sec
Setting the Command response waiting time.

If there is no response from a modem during setting time, it is
considered as a communication failure after the setting time and the
status of modem failure is maintained.
COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM / CONNET PARAM / Connect TO

Range
[CONNECT PARAMETER]
>Cmd Res TO:
2
>Connect TO:
30
>Idle Time:
60
0 ~ 255 sec
Default 30
Step
1 sec
Setting the Modem connection waiting time.

If there is no connection during setting time, it is considered as a
connection failure after the setting time, the status of modem failure is
maintained.
COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM / CONNET PARAM / Idle Time

Range
[CONNECT PARAMETER]
>Cmd Res TO:
2
>Connect TO:
30
>Idle Time:
60
0 ~ 255 sec
Default 60sec
Step
1 sec
Setting the Modem connection close time.

During setting time, the connection is closed after the setting time.
COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM / CONNET PARAM / SMS Use (Option)

Range
[CONNECT PARAMETER]
>Idle Time:
60
>SMS Use?:
DIABLE
>SMS Time:
5
DIABLE,ENABLE
Default DIABLE
Step
Enable or disable Short Message Service (SMS) function.
COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM / CONNET PARAM / SMS Time (Option)

Range
[CONNECT PARAMETER]
>Idle Time:
60
>SMS Use:
DIABLE
>SMS Time:
5
0~255sec
Default 5sec
Step
1sec
SMS Time is a waiting time to wait for response after a short message
of SMS is sent.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
69
COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM / CONNET PARAM / SMS Type (Option)

SINGLE, MULTI
Range
[CONNECT PARAMETER]
>SMS Use:
DIABLE
>SMS Time:
5
>SMS Type:
MULTI
Default MULTI
Step
Single or Multiple type is supported for SMS message.

Single type is to send one events information(max. 25 characters)
including description and the occurring time of event in one SMS
message.
Multiple type is to send maximum 4 events information(max. 11
characters respectively) including only description of each event in one
SMS message.
NOTE: The setting items, SMS Use, SMS Time and SMS Type, are shown on the menu of
EVRC2A supporting SMS function.
70
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
5.2.5. EVENT&ETC
COMMUNICATION / EVENT&ETC.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AI Evt Method
Range
[EVENT&ETC]
> AI Evt Method: OFF
> SKIP at Fault: YES
> Fault I Evt: YES
OFF,TH,DB,BOTH
Default OFF
Step
Select the Analog Event Type. This setting value is applied only to the
AI point with vitalized Event Active in DNP point map.
OFF : AI Point Event doesnt occur.
TH : Event occurs when the AI Point data is over or less than
Threshold value.
DB : Event occurs when the AI data change value is over the Deadband
value.
BOTH : TH and DB are both used.
Use EVRC2A interface program to set Event Active enable or disable
of AI point and the Threshold value and Deadband value.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / SKIP at Fault

Range
[EVENT&ETC]
> Fault I Evt: YES
NO,YES
Default YES
Step
Determine whether Threshold and Deadband AI event is generated

during Fault pickup.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / Fault I Evt

Range
[EVENT&ETC]
> Fault I Evt: YES
NO,YES
Default YES
Step
NO : No Fault current event generated.

YES : Fault current event is generated at every fault sequence.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / BI Queue Size

Range
[EVENT&ETC]
> BI Queue Size: 256
> BI Evt Mode:
ALL
> AI Queue Size: 256
32,64,128,256
Default 256
Step
Set the Binary Queue Size.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
71
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / BI Evt Mode

Range
[EVENT&ETC]
> BI Evt Mode:
ALL
ALL, LAST
Default ALL
Step
Set the Binary Event Mode.

ALL : All status is buffed for the same point.
LAST : Only last event is buffed for the same point.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AI Queue Size

Range
[EVENT&ETC]
> BI Evt Mode:
ALL
32,64,128,256
Default 256
Step
Step
Set the Analog Queue Size.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AI Evt Mode

Range
[EVENT&ETC]
> AI Evt Mode:
ALL
> CI Queue Size: 256
> CI Evt Mode:
ALL
ALL, LAST
Default ALL
Set the Analog Event Mode.
ALL : All status is buffed for the same point.

COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / CI Queue Size
Range
[EVENT&ETC]
> AI Evt Mode: OFF
> CI Evt Mode:
ALL
32,64,128,256
Default 256
Step
Step
Set the Counter Queue Size.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / CI Evt Mode

Range
[EVENT&ETC]
> AI Evt Mode:
ALL
> CI Evt Mode:
ALL
ALL, LAST
Default ALL
Set the Counter Event Mode.
ALL : All Counter is buffed for the same point.

72
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AI V Unit

Range
[EVENT&ETC]
> CI Evt Mode:
ALL
> AI V Unit:
10V
> AI P Unit:
10K
1V, 10V
Default 10V
Step
Set the data format of AI(Analog Input) points associated with a

voltage.
1V: 1V per 1count of transmitted data. If a voltage magnitude is
13.2kV, the corresponding AI point transmits 13200.
10V: 10V per 1count of transmitted data. If a voltage magnitude is
13.2kV, the corresponding AI point transmits 1320.
NOTE : These settings are supported from version 6.04 of
EVRC2A_N6,NT. The data format of AI points associated with a
voltage on previous version is fixed to support 10V per 1count .
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AI P Unit

Range
[EVENT&ETC]
> CI Evt Mode:
ALL
> AI V Unit:
10V
> AI P Unit:
10K
1K, 10K
Default 10K
Step
Set the data format of AI(Analog Input) points associated with
power.
1K: 1K per 1count of transmitted data. If active power is 660kW, the
corresponding AI point transmits 660.
10K: 10K per 1count of transmitted data. If active power is 660kW, the
corresponding AI point transmits 66.
NOTE : These settings are supported from version 6.04 of
EVRC2A_N6,NT. The data format of AI points associated with a
voltage on previous version is fixed to support 10K per 1count .
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
73
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC/ Daily Max I

Range
[EVENT&ETC]
> AI P Unit:
10K
> Daily Max I:
NO
> Daily Energy:
NO
NO,YES
Default NO
Step
Select whether to transfer the AI event about daily max. load current.
NO : Daily Max. Load Current is not recorded as event.
YES : Daily Max. Load Current is recorded as event.
NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.12 of
EVRC2A_N6,NT.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC/ Daily Energy

Range
[EVENT&ETC]
> AI P Unit:
10K
> Daily Max I:
NO
> Daily Energy:
NO
NO,YES
Default NO
Step
Select whether to transfer the AI event about energy at midnight.

NO : Daily Energy is not recorded as event.
YES : Daily Energy is recorded as event.
EVRC2A_N6,NT.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC/ Time Syn Ref

Range
[EVENT&ETC]
>Daily Energy:
NO
>Tims Syn Ref:LOCAL
>Evt Time Type:LOCAL
LOCAL,GMT
Default LOCAL
Step
Set Reference Time Type. It signifies the time data type when Time
Synching with the master station.
NOTE :
This setting is set to be GMT and the setting values associated
with GMT(in TIME
SET&DIS TYPE menu) are set up
incorrectly, the time internal clock in EVRC2A can be changed

incorrectly at time synchronization.
EVRC2A_NT.
74
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC/ Evt Time Type

Range
[EVENT&ETC]
>Daily Energy:
NO
>Tims Syn Ref:LOCAL
>Evt Time Type:LOCAL
LOCAL,GMT
Default LOCAL
Step
Set the time type for event recorders in DNP Communication.

NOTE :
The location of Evt Time Type setting depends on
EVRC2A_NT version.
y Ver 7.04 and later : Within RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICTION
/ EVENT&ETC menu.
y Prior to Ver 7.04 : Within RELAY SETUP / TIME SET&DIS
TYPE. The name of this setting is indicated as "Evt Sent
Type".
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
75
5.3. Clock
In order to configure current date and time, go to PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK
SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLOCK menu.
The CLOCK menu screen can vary according to the EVRC2A version.
Prior to Ver 6.15 of EVRC2A
RELAY SETUP / CLOCK
Press [ENT] button at and then as shown at , a cursor is marked
[CURRENT TIME]
2009/11/05 21:02:38
PRESS <ENT>
TO SET
to be able to change current date and time

1) Use [][] button to change number and press [] button to
move to next item.
[SETTING TIME]
2009/11/05 21:02:38
PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE
2) After all settings for time are changed, press [ENT] button to save.
Press [ENT] button at to save the changed time settings
[SAVE TIME]
2009/11/06 15;01:50
PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE
If procedure of saving is completed, is shown.

If [ESC] button is pressed at , is shown and the changed time
settings are not saved.
[SAVE TIME]
* SUCCESS *
[SAVE TIME]
* ABORT *
76
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
From Ver 6.15 of EVRC2A

RELAY SETUP / CLOCK
Screen indicates the present time.
[CURRENT TIME]
L2009/01/01 09:00:00
G2009/01/01 00:00:00
PRESS <ENT>
TO SET
[CURRENT TIME]
L
PRESS <ENT>
TO SET
Indicates the local time types present time.

Indicates the GMT time types present time.
Press [ENT] button at and then as shown at , a cursor is marked
to be able to change current date and time.
It sets the present time to GMT Time or Local time according to the
TIME SET&DIS TYPE menus Set Type setting.
[SETTING TIME]
L2009/01/01 09:00:00
PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE
1) Use [][] button to change number and press [] button to

move to next item.
2) After all settings for time are changed, press [ENT] button to save.
[SAVE TIME]
L2009/01/01 09:00:00
PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE
Press [ENT] button at to save the changed time settings

If procedure of saving is completed, is shown.
[SAVE TIME]
* SUCCESS *
If [ESC] button is pressed at , is shown and the changed time

settings are not saved.
[SAVE TIME]
* ABORT *
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
77
5.4. Event Recorder

Event Recording elements are set such as Recording and Sampling timing and so on.
Move to PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / EVENT
RECORDER to select setting for the event recording elements.
RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / Fault Cycle
[EVENT RECORDER]
>Fault Cycle:
ON
>Len of Pre F:
4
>Load Profile:
ON
ON, OFF
Range
Default ON
Step
Select On or Off for Fault Cycle recording.

Recorded
Fault
Cycle
can
be
viewed
in
menu,
EVENT
RECORDER.
RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / Len of Pre F
[EVENT RECORDER]
>Fault Cycle:
ON
>Len of Pre F:
4
>Load Profile:
ON
Range
0 ~ 14 cycle
Default 4
Step
1 cycle
Enter the length of prefault in fault cycle.
RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / Load Profile

[EVENT RECORDER]
>Fault Cycle:
ON
>Len of Pre F:
4
>Load Profile:
ON
Range
ON, OFF
Default ON
Step
Select On or Off for Load Profile recording.

Recorded Load Profile can be viewed in menu, EVENT
RECORDER.
RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / L.P save time(m)

[EVENT RECORDER]
>Fault Cycle:
ON
>Len of Pre F:
4
>L.P save time(m):15
Range
5,10, 15,20,30,60 min
Default 15
Step
Set Load Profile recording interval.
78
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
5.5. Clear Saved Data

In order to reset saved data, go to PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING /
RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA menu.
RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA
[CLEAR SAVED DATA]
>1.Fault Cycle
>2.System Status
>3.Load Profile
>4.Daignostic
>5.Max Demand
>6.Energy
>7.Counter
>8.Wear Monitor
>9.Fault Trip
>10.P-Quality Count
>11.P-Quality Event
>12.Comm Event
>13.All Saved Data
FAULT CYCLE DATA

PRESS ENT TO CLEAR
Clear Saved Data

Select item for clearing and then press [ENT] button.
If procedure of clearing is completed, the message, EVENT CLEAR
SUCCESS is shown.
y Fault Cycle
y System Status
y Load Profile
y Diagnostic
y Max Demand
y Energy
FAULT CYCLE DATA

!! DATA CLEARED !!
y Counter
y Wear Monitor
y Fault Trip
y P-Quality Counter
y P-Quality Event
y Communication Buffer
y All Saved Data
NOTE : It is recommended to have Backup data because
Cleared(Deleted) data can not be recovered.
5.6. Factory Debug

This menu is for Manufacturers maintenance purpose.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
79
5.7. Gas Sensor Type

Move to PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / GAS
SENSOR TYPE to select setting for the gas sensor type.
PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / GAS SENSOR TYPE
[GAS SENSOR TYPE]
>Type Select: TYPE2
NONE, TYPE1, TYPE2
Range
Default NONE
Step
NONE : Gas Sensor is not used.

TYPE1 : Set TYPE1 if Recloser manufactured before JUNE, 2005.
TYPE2 : Set TYPE2 if Recloser manufactured from JULY, 2005.
NOTE : According to a recloser type, they may be no this setting on the menu.
5.8. Time Set & Display Type Option

It is to set Date Display for all related Menu.
Move to PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / TIME
SET&DIS TYPE.
RELAY SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE / GMT Sign*
[TIME SET&DISTYPE]
>Set Type:
LOCAL
>GMT Sign:
>GMT Hour:
0
Range
+,-
Default
Step
Set GMT time and the local time off-set direction. Local time is faster
than GMT time, select +, otherwise, select -.
RELAY SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE / GMT Hour*

[TIME SET&DISTYPE]
>Set Type:
LOCAL
>GMT Sign:
>GMT Hour:
0
80
Range
0~23
Default
Step
Set the hour difference between local time and GMT.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RELAY SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE / GMT Min*

[TIME SET&DISTYPE]
>GMT Hour:
0
>GMT Min :
0
>Disp Type:
YMD
Range
0~59
Default 0
Step
Set the minute difference between local time and GMT.
NOTE
Korea Local time is 9 hour faster than UTC time, set it as follows (+9:00);
Sing : +, Hour : 9, Min : 0
NOTE
If the setting values associated with GMT are set up incorrectly, the problems can be happened
as follows.
-
If the "Time Syn Ref" is set to be GMT, the time of the internal clock in EVRC2A can
be changed incorrectly at time synchronization.
If the time type of the DNP communication event is set to be GMT, the time of event
transmitted is not correct.
NOTE : The above set values marked with * are indicated from Ver 6.15 of EVRCA.
RELAY SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE / Disp Type
[TIME SET&DISTYPE]
>GMT Min :
0
>Disp Type:
YMD
>Time Syn Ref: GMT
Range
YMD, MDY
Default YMD
Step
YMD : it displays in turn Year / Month / Date

MDY : it displays in turn Month / Date / Year
RELAY SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE / Time Syn Ref

[TIME SET&DISTYPE]
>GMT Min :
0
>Disp Type:
YMD
>Time Syn Ref: GMT
Range
LOCAL, GMT
Default GMT
Step
Set Reference Time Type when time need in a device is synchronized

with GPS(or IRIG).
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
81
6. SYSTEM SETUP
System set shall be set independently for each bank. However, from version 4.41, regardless of
bank, it will be applied to all other banks if it is set in a bank.
Sets following items for System
y
CT Ratio
VT or PT Ratio
Power Line Frequency, Phase rotation
Panel sleep time
Opto-Input setting
Relay output setting
Loop Control setting Option
Set Group Change setting Option
Power Quality Option
6.1. Current Sensing

6.1.1. Description
This Setting group is critical for all over-current protection features that have settings specified
in multiples of CT rating. When the relay is ordered, the phase, ground, and sensitive ground CT
inputs must be specified as 1 Amp.
As the phase CTs are connected in wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase
currents (Ia + Ib + Ic = Neutral Current = 3 I0) is used as the input for the neutral over-current. In
addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the circuit primary
conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor may also be used. For this configuration,
the ground CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the
sensitive earth input may be used. In this case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be
entered.
For additional details on CT connections, refer to (see 13.12. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram).
82
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
6.1.2. Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / CURRENT SENSING / PHA CT Ratio
[CURRENT SENSING]
>PHA CT Ratio: 1000
GND CT Ratio: 1000
SEF CT Ratio: 1000
Range
1 ~ 1200
Default 1000
Step
Enter the phase CT primary current value.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / CURRENT SENSING / GND CT Ratio

[CURRENT SENSING]
PHA CT Ratio: 1000
>GND CT Ratio: 1000
SEF CT Ratio: 1000
Range
1 ~ 1200
Default 1000
Step
Enter the ground CT primary current value.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / CURRENT SENSING / SEF CT Ratio

[CURRENT SENSING]
PHA CT Ratio: 1000
GND CT Ratio: 1000
>SEF CT Ratio: 1000
Range
1 ~ 1200
Default 1000
Step
Enter the sensitive earth CT primary current value.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
83
6.2. Line VS Sensing

6.2.1. Description
To measure Source Voltage, set Connect Type, 2nd Nominal Voltage, VT Ratio.
With Line VTs installed, the EVRC2A can be used to perform voltage measurements, power
calculations, and directional control of over-current elements.
6.2.2. Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VS SENSING / Connect Type
[LINE VS SENSING]
>Connect Type: NONE
VT 2nd(v):
100.0
VT Ratio:
155.9
Range
NONE, WYE, DELTA, VD-W, VD-D
Default VD-W
Step
Enter None if line VTs are not to be used.

NONE : VT uninstalled.
If used, external PT by user, enter the VT connection made to the
system as Wye or Delta.
WYE : Install type wye.
DELTA : Install type delta.
If installed VT of Capacitor Voltage Divide type.
VD-W : If the user system made to 3 phase 4 wire.
VD-D : If the user system made to 3 phase 3 wire.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VT SENSING / VS 2nd(v)

[LINE VS SENSING]
Connect Type: NONE
>VT 2nd(v):
100.0
VT Ratio:
155.9
Range
30.0 ~ 250.0 V
Default 100.0
Step
0.1 V
Enter Secondary Nominal Voltage(V)

This setting is the voltage across the VT secondary winding when
nominal voltage is applied to the primary.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VT SENSING / VS Ratio

[LINE VS SENSING]
Connect Type: NONE
VT 2nd(v):
100.0
>VT Ratio:
155.9
Range
10.0 ~ 760.0
Default 155.9
Step
0.1
Enter the VT primary to secondary turns-ratio with this setting.
84
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
6.2.3. Setting Examples

Use of VD(CVD or RVD)
Case of VD(CVD or RVD) installed in Recloser, setup as follows;
Usable in Wye connection. Set VT2nd(v) 100 as Default.
PT Ratio is calculated as below.
Voltage- = Voltage-N SQRT(3)
Voltage-N = VT 2nd(v) VT Ratio
Hence,
15- = 8.66-N, therefore 8.66-N = 55.5(V) 155.9
If user line voltage between phases (Voltage-) is 11, set VT2nd(v) of 40.7V and set VT Ratio
of 155.9 (11- => 6.35-N, 6.35 = 40.7(V) 155.9)
27- = 15.59-N, therefore 15.59-N = 100(V) 155.9
38- = 21.94-N, therefore 21.94-N = 140.7(V) 155.9
Use of External PT by User
Line is Wye connection type and has V- = 15. If external rated PT is 14400 : 120, then VT
Ratio is 14400/120. Because of 15- = 8.66-N, VT2nd(v) is 8.66-N / 120 = 71.2V
Line with Delta connection type and has V-= 15. If external rated PT is 14400 : 120, then
VT Ratio is 14400/120 and VT2nd(v) is 15- / 120 = 125V
Table 6-1. VT Ratios of External PTs
Line-Line
Voltage
Voltage Divider
Potential Transformer
Wye connection
Wye connection
VT 2nd (v)
VT Ratio
VT 2nd (v)
15
100
86.6
71.2
27
100
155.9
72.5
38
100
219.4
73.1
VT Ratio
120
(14400:120)
215
(25800:120)
300
(36000:120)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Delta connection
VT 2nd (v)
125
125.6
126.7
VT Ratio
120
(14400:120)
215
(25800:120)
300
(36000:120)
85
6.3. Line VL Sensing

6.3.1. Description
To measure Load Voltage, set Connect Type, 2nd Nominal Voltage, VT Ratio.
With Line VTs installed, the EVRC2A can be used to perform synchronism elements.
6.3.2. Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VL SENSING / Connect Type
[LINE VL SENSING]
>Connect Type: NONE
VT 2nd(v):
100.0
VT Ratio:
155.9
Range
NONE, WYE, DELTA, VD-W, VD-D
Default VD-W
Step
Enter None if line VTs are not to be used.

NONE : VT uninstalled.
If used, external PT by user, enter the VT connection made to the
system as Wye or Delta.
WYE : Install type wye.
DELTA : Install type delta.
If installed VT of Capacitor Voltage Divide type.
VD-W : If the user system made to 3 phase 4 wire.
VD-D : If the user system made to 3 phase 3 wire.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VL SENSING / VT 2nd(v)

[LINE VL SENSING]
Connect Type: NONE
>VT 2nd(v):
100.0
VT Ratio:
86.6
Range
30.0 ~ 250.0 V
Default 100.0
Step
0.1 V
Enter Secondary Nominal Voltage(V)

This setting is the voltage across the VT secondary winding when
nominal voltage is applied to the primary.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VL SENSING / VT Ratio

[LINE VL SENSING]
Connect Type: NONE
VT 2nd(v):
100.0
>VT Ratio:
155.9
Range
10.0 ~ 760.0
Default 155.9
Step
0.1
Enter the VT primary to secondary turns-ratio with this setting.
86
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VL SENSING / Install Type

[LINE VL SENSING]
VT 2nd(v):
100.0
VT Ratio:
155.9
>Install Type:
3P
Range
3P, 1P-R, 1P-S, 1P-T
Default 3P
Step
Insert the type of sensing voltage for the recloser body unit.
3P : Three phases voltage sensing installed
1P-R : One phase voltage sensing installed to the R phase of the
recloser body unit.
1P-S : One phase voltage sensing installed to the S phase of the
recloser body unit.
1P-T : One phase voltage sensing installed to the T phase of the
recloser body unit.
NOTE : When the voltage sensor to the load side is installed to
only one phase or none of the phase, the following functions
performed by the voltage measurement are operated incorrectly if
this setting is changed.
y
Directional Control
Loss of Phase
Synchronism Check
Voltage Unbalance Detection
Live Load Blocking
Loop Control
6.3.3. Setting Example

Refer to (6.2.3. Setting Examples)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
87
6.4. System Power

6.4.1. Description
Menu to set Frequency of Protected Line and installed Phase rotation
6.4.2. Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / SYSTEM POWER / Frequency
[SYSTEM POWER]
>Frequency:
50
Phase Rotation: ABC
>Install Dir:
NOR
Range
50, 60
Default 50
Step
Select the nominal power system frequency. This value is used as a

default to set the optimal digital sampling rate.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / SYSTEM POWER / Phase Rotation

[SYSTEM POWER]
Frequency:
50
>Phase Rotation: ABC
>Install Dir:
NOR
Range
ABC, ACB
Default ABC
Step
Select the phase rotation of the power system.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / SYSTEM POWER / Install Direction

[SYSTEM POWER]
Frequency:
50
>Install Dir:
NOR
Range
NOR(NORMAL), REV(REVERSE)
Default NOR
Step
Select the install direction of Recolser.

During operating after setup, change only this setting to convert a load
side to a source side or reversely.
NOTE : When the voltage sensor to the load side is installed to
only one phase or none of the phase, the following functions
performed by the voltage measurement are operated incorrectly if
this setting is changed.
88
Directional Control
Loss of Phase
Synchronism Check
Voltage Unbalance Detection
Live Load Blocking
Loop Control
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
NOTE: The voltage sensing type to the load side can be checked on the setting of "Install
Type" in the "LINE VL SENSING" menu.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / SYSTEM POWER / Phase Combination
[SYSTEM POWER]
>Install Dir:
NOR
>Phase Combi:
abc
Range
abc, cab, bca, acb, bac, cba
Default abc
Step
Put real phase of power system to a bushing or a terminal of a control

device. As example, if setting value is cab, it means that bushing A is
connected with phase C and bushing B is connected with phase A.
NOTE: The Phase Combination setting will be shown from version 6.04 of EVRC2AN6,NT. In order to get the details relevant to the connection for EVRC2A-N6,NT
from version 6.04, refer the following figure and table.
Figure 6-1. Phase Connection
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
89
Table 6-2. Phase Connection & Display Mapping Table

Line feeding
Recommend Setting
Bushing Terminal
Phase
Phase Mapping Result

Install Direction
Combination
Case 1 :
abc
abc
NORAMAL
ABC
Case 2 :
cab
cab
ABC
Case 3 :
bca
bca
ABC
Case 4 :
acb
acb
ABC
Case 5 :
bac
bac
ABC
Case 6 :
cba
cba
ABC
Case 7 :
abc
abc
RST
Case 8 :
cab
cab
RST
Case 9 :
bca
bca
RST
Case 10 :
acb
acb
RST
Case 11 :
bac
bac
RST
Case 12 :
cba
RST
90
cba
REVERSE
LCD/INDEX Display :
Bushing/Controller
Source V(Load V) / Current
Terminal
Va(Vr)/Ia
A(R)/IA
Vb(Vs)/Ib
B(S)/IB
Vc(Vt)/Ic
C(T)/IC
Va(Vr)/Ia
B(S)/IB
Vb(Vs)/Ib
C(T)/IC
Vc(Vt)/Ic
A(R)/IA
Va(Vr)/Ia
C(T)/IC
Vb(Vs)/Ib
A(R)/IA
Vc(Vt)/Ic
B(S)/IB
Va(Vr)/Ia
A(R)/IA
Vb(Vs)/Ib
C(T)/IC
Vc(Vt)/Ic
B(S)/IB
Va(Vr)/Ia
B(S)/IB
Vb(Vs)/Ib
A(R)/IA
Vc(Vt)/Ic
C(T)/IC
Va(Vr)/Ia
C(T)/IC
Vb(Vs)/Ib
B(S)/IB
Vc(Vt)/Ic
A(R)/IA
Va(Vr)/Ia
R(A)/IA
Vb(Vs)/Ib
S(B)/IB
Vc(Vt)/Ic
T(C)/IC
Va(Vr)/Ia
S(B)/IB
Vb(Vs)/Ib
T(C)/IC
Vc(Vt)/Ic
R(A)/IA
Va(Vr)/Ia
T(C)/IC
Vb(Vs)/Ib
R(A)/IA
Vc(Vt)/Ic
S(B)/IB
Va(Vr)/Ia
R(A)/IA
Vb(Vs)/Ib
T(C)/IC
Vc(Vt)/Ic
S(B)/IB
Va(Vr)/Ia
S(B)/IB
Vb(Vs)/Ib
R(A)/IA
Vc(Vt)/Ic
T(C)/IC
Va(Vr)/Ia
T(C)/IC
Vb(Vs)/Ib
S(B)/IB
Vc(Vt)/Ic
R(A)/IA
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
6.5. Panel Sleep Time

6.5.1. Description
Menu to set the interval time that User interface panel turns into sleep mode.
6.5.2. Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / PANEL SLEEP TIME
OFF, 1 ~ 100 min
Range
[PANEL SLEEP TIME]

>Interval(m):
5
Default 5
Step
1 min
Enter the sleep mode entering time

Setting the interval time of which Panel indicator turns into Sleep
mode.
On sleep mode, press [] button to be out from the sleep mode.
6.6. Opto Input Set - Option

6.6.1. Description
Menu to set External input terminal function and Debounce time
The opto input is available as an ordering option.
Status LCD Display
EXTERNAL
INPUT
Debounce
time
X
Triger
Function execute
REMOTE mode
Figure 6-2. Input logic
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
91
6.6.2. Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / OPTO INPUT SET / I1 Func
[OPTO INPUT SET]
>I1 Func:
NONE
I1 Debounce:
0.02
I2 Func:
NONE
NONE, TRIP, , OUT8 RESET
Range
Default NONE
Step
Enter the function of External input terminal Opto input can have
following functions.
NONE
TRIP
CLOSE
PROTECTION
GROUND
SEF
Enable/Disable
Enable/Disable
Enable/Disable
RECLOSE
CONTROL
ALTERNATE SETTINGS
Enable/Disable
Locked/Unlocked
Enable/Disable
PROGRAM1
PROGRAM2
HOT LINE TAG
Enable/Disable
Enable/Disable
Enable/Disable
FAULT INDICATION
RESET
BATTERY LOAD TEST
OUTPUT RELAY
18 RESET.
For more details, refer to Appendix A. OPTO INPUT FUNCTION.

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / OPTO INPUT SET / I1 Debounce
[OPTO INPUT SET]
I1 Func:
NONE
>I1 Debounce:
0.02
I2 Func:
NONE
Range
0.01 ~ 9.99 sec
Default 0.02
Step
Enter debounce time to prevent chattering in Input
Input 2 ~ Input 8, the same as Input 1 above
92
0.01 sec
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
6.7. Output Relay Set - Option

6.7.1. Description
Menu to set External Output Terminal Function and Output type
The output relay is available as an ordering option.
Protective Elements
Relay Setting
( 50.51,27,59...etc )
Function Occurrence
Status LCD Display
S/R LATCH
Pulse T
Type
PULSE
LATCH
Latch
S
Q
R
OUTxx Relay
OPTO INPUT SET(OUTxx Reset)

Pulse
OUTPUT RELAY TEST
2s
Figure 6-3. Output logic
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
93
6.7.2. Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / OUTPUT RELAY SET / O1 Func
[OUTPUT RELAY SET]
>O1 Func:
NONE
O1 Type: S/R LATCH
O1 Pulse T:
0.05
NONE, TRIP, , NEQ FLT*
Range
Default NONE
Step
Enter the function of External output terminal.

Output Relay can have following function.
NONE
TRIP
CLOSE
FAIL TRIP
FAIL CLOSE
FAIL AC
FAIL BATTTERY
27 ELEMENT
59 ELEMENT
25 ELEMENT
81 ELEMENT
79 RESET
79CYCLE
79LOCKOUT
SELFCHECK
PROTECTION Enable
GROUND Enable
SEF Enable
RECLOSE Enable
CONTROL Locked
REMOTE Enable
PROGRAM1 Enable
PROGRAM2 Enable
HOT LINE TAG Enable
LO/RE OPEN
ALARM
CLOSE - 52A
INPUT 1~ 8
GAS LOW*
OPEN - 52B*
SYSTEM OK*
CLOSE BLOCK*
MECHANISM LOCK*
GAS LOW LOCK*
EXT TRIP LOCK*
INST FAULT*
DELAY FAULT*
PHASE FAULT*
GROUND FAULT*
ALTERNATE SETTINGS
Enable
HIGH CURRENT
LOCKOUT FAULT*
SEF FAULT*
NEQ FAULT*
For more detail, refer to Appendix B. RELAY OUTPUT

FUNCTION.
NOTE : The function marked with * is an option. That function
may not be supported by the option type.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / OUTPUT RELAY SET / O1 Type

[OUTPUT RELAY SET]
O1 Func:
NONE
>O1 Type: S/R LATCH
O1 Pulse T:
0.05
Range
PULSE, LATCH, S/R LATCH
Default S/R LATCH
Step
S/R LATCH: Output signal is delivered only this function activates (ON).
PULSE: Output signal is delivered only during PULSE T. To activate
Output again, turn this function OFF and then, turn it ON again.
LATCH: Output signal is delivered once this function ON. To turn it
off, it needs Reset signal and it is set in OPTO INPUT SET
94
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / OUTPUT RELAY SET / O1 Pulse T

[OUTPUT RELAY SET]
O1 Func:
NONE
O1 Type: S/R LATCH
>O1 Pulse T:
0.05
Range
0.01 ~ 99.99 sec
Default 0.05
Step
0.01 sec
Sets Duration time if OUTPUT TYPE is PULSE
Output 2 ~ 8 is the same as above.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
95
6.8. Loop Control - Option

The purpose of using LOOP CONTROL is to isolate a fault area and protect the normal
operation area by coordinating with C/B or Recloser when a fault occurs.
Loop control is able to provide automation system with using Sectionalizing Recloser, MID
point Recloser, TIE point Recloser.
Loop control is performed by voltage sensing of DV(Dead Line Voltage), LV(Live Line Voltage).
Sectionalizing Recloser(SEC)
When a fault is occurred from the source side of Sectionalizing Recloser and backup C/B
operates, the line becomes DV and if it continues, it is figured as a permanent fault. Hence,
Sectionalizing Recloser is opened. After Sectionalizing Recloser is opened and TIEpoint
Recloser is closed, the current flows in opposite way. Therefore, the load side of Sectionalizing
Recloser can keep the live line. When Load side of Sectionalizing Recloser has a fault, OCR
Function is operated and the load side is disconnected.
MIDpoint Recloser(MID)
When a fault is occurred in the source side of MIDpoint Recloser and backup C/B or
Sectionalizing Recloser operates, the line becomes DV status and if it continues, it is figured as a
permanent fault, then automatically the setting is changed to Alternate setting. After changed to
Alternate setting, when TIEpoint Recloser is closed, the current flows in opposite way. During
TIEpoint Recloser closed, when a fault occurs, MIDpoint Recloser trips once and lockouts. After
recovering the fault, connect C/B and when the line becomes LV, the setting is automatically
changed to Primary setting and MIDpoint Recloser is closed.
When Load side of MIDpoint Recloser gets a fault, OCR Function is operated and disconnects
the load side.
TIEpoint Recloser (TIE)
TIEpoint Recloser automatically closes when either Source side or Load side becomes DV.
When a fault occurs during automatic closing, the recloser trips once and locks out.
TIEpoint recloser automatically opens when loop control operates automatic closing at both side
and when both sides become DV.
96
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
LCD Initial Screen

Recloser type that is selected in Loop control, are displayed on LCD Initial Screen.
Press ENT KEY to check operation status on the Initial Screen to see loop control mode.
LOOP CONTROL: [SEC] , [MID], [TIE]
Display a selected type.
VS: [DV], [LV]
Display Source side voltage of Recloser either Dead line
voltage or Live line voltage.
VL: [DV], [LV]
LOOP CONTROL
[TIE]
VS-[DV] VSDLT-[ - ]
VL-[DV] VLDLT-[ - ]
AUTO RESTORE T [ - ]
Display Load side voltage of Recloser either Dead line

voltage or Live line voltage.
VSDLT: [ - ], [RUN]
Displays loop control function is operating due to the dead
line voltage of Reclosers Source side.
VLDLT: [ - ], [RUN]
Displays loop control function is operating due to the dead
line voltage of Reclosers Load side.
AUTO RESTORE T: [ - ], [RUN]
Displays Restoring status after Loop control operation.
LOOP CONTROL KEY

Use PROGRAM KEY to use Loop control on User interface Panel.
Program 1: Enable/Disables Loop control function.
Lamp is on when Loop control function is Enabled.
SEC, MID can be selected on CLOSE status and TIE can be
selected on OPEN status.
Program 2: Enable/Disables Auto restoration function of
SEC, MID.
Figure 6-4. Loop Control Key
Lamp is on when Auto restoration function is enabled.

Auto restoration function is, after loop control operation,
Auto Rest T timer operates till timeout, and restores the
preset values.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
97
6.8.1. Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / Type Select
[LOOP CONTROL]
>Type Select:
NONE
>VRS - S/M:
VS
>VRS - Tie:
VS
Range
NONE, SEC, MID, TIE
Default NONE
Step
Select the Recloser Type and add Loop Control function.

After selecting, press Program 1 Key to enable Loop Control.
NONE : Loop control is not in use.
SEC : SECtionalizing Recloser
MID : MIDpoint Recloser
TIE : TIEpoint Recloser
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / VRS to S/M

[LOOP CONTROL]
>Type Select:
NONE
>VRS - S/M:
VS
>VRS - Tie:
VS
Range
VS, VL
Default VS
Step
Voltage Response Side to SEC&MID : The setting values are used

in SEC, MID.
Recloser operates upon selected side of voltage sensing.
Select the Voltage response side when Recloser type is SEC & MID
VS : Reclosers Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage
VL : Reclosers Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage
Standard Model, EVRC2A uses VD(Voltage divider, CVD or RVD) to
measure the voltage. It measures only A, B, C, R phases, phase S and T
are not measured.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / VRS to Tie

[LOOP CONTROL]
>Type Select:
NONE
>VRS - S/M:
VS
>VRS - Tie:
VS
Range
VS, VL, VS&VL
Default VS
Step
Voltage Response Side to Tie : The setting value is used in TIE.

TIE operates upon selected side of voltage sensing.
VS : Reclosers Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage
VL : Reclosers Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage
VS&VL : Loop control operates one of either Source side or load side
voltage becomes dead line voltage.
98
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / VS wire

[LOOP CONTROL]
>VS Wire:
3PN
>VL Wire:
1PN(A)
>Cng Alt-Mid :
OFF
Range
3PN, 3PP, 1PN(A), 1PN(B), 1PN(C), 1PP(AB), 1PP(BC), 1PP(CA)
Default 3PN
Step
Line VS Wire : Select Reclosers Source side(A,B,C phase) voltage

sensor(VD or VT) connection type.
Selected phase is used to figure dead/live line voltage.
VD type Control measures A, B, C phase voltage.
3PN : 3 Phase-Neutral
3PP : 3 Phase-Phase
1PN(A) : Phase A-Neutral
1PN(B) : Phase B-Neutral
1PN(C) : Phase C-Neutral
1PP(AB) : Phase A-Phase B
1PP(BC) : Phase B-Phase C
1PP(CA) : Phase C-Phase A
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / VL wire

[LOOP CONTROL]
>VS Wire:
3PN
>VL Wire:
1PN(A)
>Cng Alt-Mid :
OFF
Range
3PN, 3PP, 1PN(A), 1PN(B), 1PN(C), 1PP(AB), 1PP(BC), 1PP(CA)
Default 3PN
Step
Line VL Wire : Select Recloser Load side(R,S,T phase) voltage

sensor(VD or VT) connection type.
Selected phase is used to figure dead/live line voltage.
Select 1PN(A) to measure R phase voltage for VD(CVD or RVD) type
Control S,T phase are not measured.
3PN : 3 Phase-Neutral
3PP : 3 Phase-Phase
1PN(A) : Phase A-Neutral
1PN(B) : Phase B-Neutral
1PN(C) : Phase C-Neutral
1PP(AB) : Phase A-Phase B
1PP(BC) : Phase B-Phase C
1PP(CA) : Phase C-Phase A
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
99
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / Cng Alt- Mid

[LOOP CONTROL]
>VS Wire:
3PN
>VL Wire:
1PN(A)
>Cng Alt-Mid :
OFF
Range
OFF, ON
Default OFF
Step
Change Alternate Setting at Mid Point : Set Value is used in

MID.
Select if Primary setting is automatically changed to Alternate setting,
after set time (LL Regain T).
To use this function, Loop control (setting value) of Primary and
Alternate shall be set as the same.
OFF : Turn off auto change.
ON : Turn on auto change.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / Cng Alt-Tie

[LOOP CONTROL]
>Cng Alt-Tie:
OFF
>LC After Cl:DISABLE
>LC After Op:DISABLE
Range
OFF, ON(VS), ON(VL), ON(BOTH)
Default OFF
Step
Change Alternate Setting at Tie Point : Set value is used in TIE.

Select if Primary setting is automatically changed to Alternate setting,
after set time (LL Regain T).
To use this function, Loop control (setting value) of Primary and
Alternate shall be set as the same.
OFF : Turn off auto change.
ON(VS) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VS.
ON(VL) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VL.
ON(BOTH) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VS or VL.
100
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / LC After Cl

[LOOP CONTROL]
>Cng Alt-Tie:
OFF
DISABLE, ENABLE
Range
Default DISABLE
Step
Select After Manual Close : Setting value is used in SEC.

To select Loop Control automatically enable after recloser is closed by
Manual operation. Manual close is referred when the operation signal is
coming from remote or local. When Loop control function is enabled,
PROGRAM 1 LED on User interface panel is turned on.
DISABLE : After Manual close, Loop control function is not
automatically activated.(Use PROGRAM 1 to activate it)
ENABLE : After Manual close, Loop control function is automatically
activated.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / LC After Op

[LOOP CONTROL]
>Cng Alt-Tie:
OFF
DISABLE, ENABLE
Range
Default DISABLE
Step
Select After Manual Open : Setting Value is used in TIE.

To select Loop control function automatically enable after recloser is
opened by manual operation. Manual open is referred when the
operation signal is coming from remote or local. When Loop control
function is enabled, PROGRAM 1 LED on User interface panel is
turned on.
DISABLE : After Manual open, Loop control function is not
automatically activated. (Use PROGRAM 1 to activate it)
ENABLE : After Manual open, Loop control function is automatically
activated.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / OT Both DL

[LOOP CONTROL]
>OT Both DL:
10.00
>Auto Rest T: 5.00
>DL V Max(%):
50.0
Range
1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 10.00
Step
0.01 sec
Open Time on Both Dead Bus : Setting value is used in TIE.

After TIE closed, source and load sides become dead line for a certain
period, TIE opens by Loop control.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
101
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / Auto Rest T

[LOOP CONTROL]
>OT Both DL:
10.00
>Auto Rest T: 5.00
>DL V Max(%):
50.0
Range
1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 5.00
Step
0.01 sec
Auto Restoration Time : Setting value is used in SEC, MID.

This is active when Program 2 on User Interface Panel is enabled.
SEC operates Loop control (Automatic Open) if a voltage selected
from VRS S/M becomes dead line. After opened, the voltage
becomes Live Line, a certain period later, restores (Automatic Close).
MID, if a voltage selected form VRS S/M becomes dead line, and
when Loop control (Chg Alt-Tie is on, it automatically changes to
Alternate Setting. After Loop control, Live Line becomes Tie Close,
and during operation, it figures as a fault and Trip Lockout. After it
becomes Live line, Restore (auto close and change to Primary setting).
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / DL V Max(%)

[LOOP CONTROL]
>OT Both DL:
10.00
>Auto Rest T: 5.00
>DL V Max(%):
50.0
Range
20.0 ~ 70.0 %
Default 50.0
Step
0.1 %
Dead Bus Maximum Voltage(%) : Sense Dead Line Voltage.

In Live Line, when a voltage is decreased below a set value, it
determines Dead Line.
In Source side, it is figured from a selected phase from VS Wire.
In Load side, it is figured from a selected phase from VL Wire.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / LL V Min(%)

[LOOP CONTROL]
>LL V Min(%):
70.0
>DL Pickup T: 50.00
>LL Regain T: 10.00
Range
50.0 ~ 85.0 %
Default 70.0
Step
0.1 %
Live Bus Minimum Voltage(%) : Sense Live Line Voltage.

In Dead Line, when a voltage is increased over a set value, it
determines Live Line.
In Source side, it is figured form a selected phase from VS Wire,
In Load side, it is figured from a selected phase from VL Wire.
102
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / DL Pickup T

[LOOP CONTROL]
>LL V Min(%):
70.0
>DL Pickup T: 50.00
>LL Regain T: 10.00
Range
1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 50.00
Step
0.01 sec
Dead Bus Pickup Time Delay : During DL Pickup T, the line

becomes Dead Line and LL Regain T Timer shall be operated so that
SEC, MID, TIE can operate.
DL Pickup T Timer is the Cumulative Timer to count Dead Line time
while C/B or Recloser is doing re-close operation.
Timer is not reset regardless of Live Line and it is reset by DL rest T
Timer. Setting shall be the same or bigger than the sum of C/B or
reclosers reclosing time.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / LL Regain T

[LOOP CONTROL]
>LL V Min(%):
70.0
>DL Pickup T: 50.00
>LL Regain T: 10.00
Range
1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 10.00
Step
0.01 sec
Live Bus Pickup Time Delay : DL Pickup T shall be finished and

during reset time, the line shall not be Live Line.
SECs reset Time shall be longer than MID 5 seconds, and MIDs shall
be longer than TIEs 5 seconds.
When timer is finished, SEC is opened, MID changes Settings from
Primary to Alternate(if Chg Alt-Mid is enable), and TIE is closed
automatically after changing settings form Primary to Alternate(if Chg
Alt-Tie is enable).
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / DBRT Time

[LOOP CONTROL]
>LL Regain T: 10.00
>DL Reset T:
5.00
>NRT After LC: 10.00
Range
1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 5.00
Step
0.01 sec
Dead Bus Reset Time : It is a delay timer to reset accumulated time

from DL Pickup T. This timer operates when DL Pickup T is set
and the line becomes Live line.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
103
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / NRT After LC

[LOOP CONTROL]
>LL Regain T: 10.00
>DL Reset T:
5.00
>NRT After LC: 10.00
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 10.00
Step
0.01 sec
Non Reclose Time After LC Action : Setting values are used in

MID, TIE.
This timer prevents from Reclosing when recloser operates due to a
fault after Loop control.
After LL Regain T and changed Settings, while backward
distributing line operating, if a fault occurs and MID trips within a set
time, MID reclose. MID trips once and lockouts. If a fault occurs and
MID trips after a set time, reclosing is executed.
After LL Regain T, when a fault occurs and TIE trips within a set
time, TIE also, trips once and lockout. If a fault occurs and TIE trips
after a set time, reclosing is executed.
104
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
6.8.2. Loop Control Logic Diagram
Figure 6-5. Sectionalizing Recloser Logic
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
105
Figure 6-6. MID Point Recloser Logic
106
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Figure 6-7. TIE Point Recloser Logic
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
107
6.8.3. Loop Control Application

5-Reclosers Loop Control
For five reclosers loop control, it consists of 2 sets of SEC(Sectionalizing Recloser), 2 sets of
MID(MIDpoint Reclosers) and 1 set of TIE(TIEpoint Recloser). Setting is in-turn form Source
side to SEC-MID-TIE.
In Table 6-3. 5-Reclosers Setting, the source side bushings of RC1, RC2, RC3 are installed for
CB1 side. And the source side bushings of RC4, RC5 are installed for CB2 side.
Table 6-3. 5-Reclosers Setting
SETTING
CB1
RC1
RC2
RC3
RC4
RC5
CB2
Type Select
SEC
MID
TIE
MID
SEC
VRS S/M
VS
VS
VS
VS
VRS Tie
VS&VL
VS Wire
3PN
3PN
3PN
3PN
3PN
VL Wire
1PN(A)
1PN(A)
1PN(A)
1PN(A)
1PN(A)
Cng Alt-Mid
ON
ON
Cng Alt-Tie
ON
LC After Cl
ENABLE
ENABLE
ENABLE
ENABLE
LC After Op
ENABLE
OT Both DL
10.00
Auto Rest T
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
DL V Max(%)
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
LL V Min(%)
70.0
70.0
70.0
70.0
70.0
DL Pickup T
22.0
22.0
22.0
22.0
22.0
LL Regain T
5.00
10.00
15.00
10.00
5.00
DL Reset T
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
NRT After LC
10.00
10.00
10.00
PROGRAM 1
ENABLE
ENABLE
ENABLE
ENABLE
ENABLE
PROGRAM 2
ENABLE
ENABLE
ENABLE
ENABLE
Reclose Time
2sec-1st reclose, 5sec-2nd reclose, 15sec-3rd reclose (lockout)

X is not used.
108
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
5-Reclosers Loop control at F1 Fault
Figure 6-8. 5-Reclosers Loop Control at F1 Fault
Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F1, CB1 operates reclosing sequence and then Trip
Lockouts. During CB1 operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated time
becomes DL Pick T. When a line is Dead Line, LL Regain T operates.
DL Pick T is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment.
SEC, MID, TIE has the same setting time.
Step2 : LL Regain T is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time,
SEC(RC1), MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) operate.
To operate LL Regain T from SECMIDTIE in turn, MID shall have longer time set
than SEC, TIE shall have longer time set than MID. When LL Regain T is enable,
SEC(RC1) is opened automatically, MID(RC2) changes to Alternate setting.
Step3 : When LL Regain T is finished, TIE(RC3) changes to Alternate setting automatically,
and then automatically close. F1 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region
shall be alive by backward distributing line.
Step4 : After removing a Fault, close CB1, then, SEC(RC1) automatically close after AutoRestoration Time.
Step5 : Manually open TIE(RC3), change MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) setting to Primary setting.
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3) to recover the line as previous normal line.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
109

Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F2, SEC(RC1) operate reclosing sequence and tirp
lockout. During SEC(RC1) operation, accumulate Dead line time, and the accumulated
Dead line time becomes DL Pick T. When the line is Dead Line, LL Regain T
operates.
MID, TIE point recloser has the same setting time.
MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) operate. To operate LL Regain T from MIDTIE in turn, TIE
shall have longer time set than MID.
When LL Regain T is enable, MID(RC2) changes to Alternate setting automatically.
Step3 : When LL Regain T is finished, TIE(RC3) automatically close after changing to
Alternate setting.
Step4 : When closing TIE(RC3), MID(RC2) trip once and lockout because of F2 fault.
F2 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region shall be alive by backward
distributing line.
Step5 : After removing a Fault, close SEC(RC1), then, MID(RC3) automatically changes to
Alternate setting after Auto Restoration Time.
Step6 : Manually open TIE(RC3) and change to Primary setting.
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3) to recover the line as previous normal line.
110
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F3, MID(RC2) operate reclosing sequence and tirp
lockout. During MID(RC2) operation, accumulate Dead line time, and the accumulated
Dead line time becomes DL Pick T. When the line is Dead Line, LL Regain T
operates.
Step2 : LL Regain T is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time, TIE(RC3)
operate. When LL Regain T is enable, TIE(RC3) changes to Alternate setting
automatically.
Step3 : When closing TIE(RC3), TIE(RC3) trip once and lockout because of F3 fault.
distributing line.
Step4 : After removing the fault, close MID(RC3)
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3), and recover the previous the line as the previous
normal line.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
111
3-Reclosers Loop Control

For three - reclosers loop control, it consists of 2 sets of SEC(Sectionalizing Recloser), 1 set of
TIE(TIEpoint Recloser). Setting is in-turn form Source side to SEC and to TIE.
In Table 6-4. 3-Reclosers Setting, the source side bushings of RC1, RC2 are installed for CB1
side. And the source side bushings of RC3 are installed for CB2 side.
Table 6-4. 3-Reclosers Setting
SETTING
CB1
RC1
RC2
RC3
CB2
Type Select
SEC
VRS S/M
TIE
SEC
VS
VS
VRS Tie
VS&VL
VS Wire
3PN
3PN
3PN
VL Wire
1PN(A)
1PN(A)
1PN(A)
Cng Alt-Mid
Cng Alt-Tie
ON
LC After Cl
ENABLE
ENABLE
LC After Op
ENABLE
OT Both DL
10.00
Auto Rest T
5.00
5.00
5.00
DL V Max(%)
50.0
50.0
50.0
LL V Min(%)
70.0
70.0
70.0
DL Pickup T
22.0
22.0
22.0
LL Regain T
5.00
10.00
5.00
DL Reset T
5.00
5.00
5.00
NRT After LC
10.00
PROGRAM 1
ENABLE
ENABLE
ENABLE
PROGRAM 2
ENABLE
ENABLE
Reclose Time
2sec-1st reclose, 5sec-2nd reclose, 15sec-3rd reclose (lockout)

X is not used.
112
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Figure 6-11. 3-Reclosers Loop control at F1 Fault
Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F1, CB1 operates reclosing sequence and then Trip
Lockouts. During CB1 operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated time
becomes DL Pick T. When a line is Dead Line, LL Regain T operates.
SEC, TIE has the same setting time.
SEC(RC1), TIE(RC2) operate. To operate LL Regain T from SECTIE in turn, TIE
shall have longer time set than SEC.
When LL Regain T is finished, SEC(RC1) is opened automatically, TIE(RC2)
automatically changes to Alternate setting and close.
distributing line.
Step3 : After removing the fault, close CB1, SEC(RC1) is automatically closed after Auto
Restoration Time.
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC2) and recover the line as the previous normal line.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
113
Figure 6-12. 3-Reclosers Loop control at F2 Fault
Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F2, SEC(RC1) operates reclosing sequence and then Trip
Lockouts. During SEC(RC1) operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated
time becomes DL Pick T. When a line is Dead Line, LL Regain T operates.
Step2 :
LL Regain T is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time,
TIE(RC2) automatically changes to Alternate setting and close.
When closing TIE(RC2), MID(RC2) trip once and lockouts because of F2.
Step3 : After removing the fault, close SEC(RC1).

Enable Loop control of TIE(RC2) and recover the line as the previous normal line.
114
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
6.9. Set Group Change - Option

Sometimes, Recloser can be installed reversely against Power Flow(supply). In this case, it is
necessary to change Protection setting. EVRC2A has two options includes Primary Setting and
Alternate Setting to help in this situation. And these settings can be selected automatically by
Set Group Change function.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / SET GROUP CHANGE / Function
[SET GROUP CHANGE]
>Function:
DISABLE
>Time interval:
30
Range
DISABLE,ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
Set whether to use Set Group Change.

When this function is used, Primary setting is applied if power flow is
forward and Alternate setting is applied if power flow is
reverse(backward).
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP/ SET GROUP CHANGE / Time interval
[SET GROUP CHANGE]
>Function:
DISABLE
>Time interval:
30
Range
10~180sec
Default 30
Step
1sec
If power flow is changed for this set time, setting group is changed.
Applying rules
y
This function is operated when Power line system is in normal condition. During fault
detecting(pickup status) or in fault condition, it does not work.
This function shall be operated when 3 phase voltages are more than 50% of rated voltage
and at least 1 phase has more than 10% of rated current.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
115
6.10. Power Quality - Option

Place the curser on 10. POWER QUALITY in SYSTEM SETUP menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu. Power Quality elements are set in this menu and sub-menu is as below.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / S-O Func (Option)
[POWER QUALITY]
>S-O Func: Disable
>S-O Duration:
20
>SAG Func: Disable
Disable, Enable
Range
Default Disable
Step
It is to set event recording of supply outage enable or disable.

Outage time, number of times and duration can be viewed in menu,
MAINTENANCE and EVENT RECORDER.
Refer to 11.4. Power Quality Option for more information.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / S-O Duration (Option)

> [POWER QUALITY]
>S-O Func: Disable
>S-O Duration:
20
>SAG Func: Disable
1 ~3600 sec
Range
Default 20
Step
1 sec
It is to set event recording detect supply outage and to set time to get
recovered from supply outage.
Refer to 11.4. Power Quality Option for more information.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / SAG Func (Option)

> [POWER QUALITY]
>S-O Func: Disable
>S-O Duration:
20
>SAG Func: Disable
Disable, Enable
Range
Default Disable
Step
It is to set event recording of sag enable or disable.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / SAG Pickup (Option)

> [POWER QUALITY]
>S-O Duration:
20
>SAG Func: Disable
>SAG Pickup:
0.80
0.30 ~ 0.95 VT(secondary nominal voltage)
Range
Default 0.80
Step
0.01
Set a detect level of Voltage sag(low voltage) for Power Quality.

Detect level is set by multiplying a set value in here to source side rated
voltage.
116
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / SAG Duration (Option)

> [POWER QUALITY]
>SAG Func: Disable
>SAG Pickup:
0.80
>SAG Duration:
5
Range
1~60 cycle
Default 5
Step
Set a detect time for voltage sag(voltage low).
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / SWL Func (Option)

> [POWER QUALITY]
>SAG Pickup:
0.80
>SAG Duration:
5
>SWL Func: Disable
Range
Disable, Enable
Default Disable
Step
It is to set event recording of swell enable or disable.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / SWL Pickup (Option)

> [POWER QUALITY]
>SWL Func: Disable
>SWL Pickup:
1.20
>SWL Duration:
20
Range
Default 1.20
Step
0.01
Set a detect level of voltage swell(high voltage) for Power Quality.

Detect level is set by multiplying a set value in here to source side rated
voltage.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / SWL Duration (Option)

> [POWER QUALITY]
>SWL Func: Disable
>SWL Pickup:
1.20
>SWL Duration:
20
Range
1~60 cycle
Default 5
Step
Set a detect time for voltage swell(voltage high).
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBI Func (Option)

> [POWER QUALITY]
>UBI Func: Disable
>UBI Pickup:
30
>UBI Duration: 4.0
Range
Disable, Enable
Default Disable
Step
It is to set event recording of current unbalance enable or disable.

NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.12 of EVRC2AN6,NT.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
117
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBI Pickup (Option)

> [POWER QUALITY]
>UBI Func: Disable
>UBI Pickup:
30
>UBI Duration: 4.0
1 ~ 100 %
Range
Default 30
Step
1%
Set a detect level of current unbalance for Power Quality.

Current unbalance is calculated by following formula.
UI rate =
I2
100
I1
NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.12 of EVRC2AN6,NT.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBI Duration (Option)

> [POWER QUALITY]
>UBI Func: Disable
>UBI Pickup:
30
>UBI Duration: 4.0
Range
0.1 ~ 60.0 sec
Default 4.0
Step
0.1 sec
Set a detect time of current unbalance.

EVRC2A-N6,NT.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBI Limit (Option)

> [POWER QUALITY]
>UBI Pickup:
30
>UBI Duration: 4.0
>UBI Limit:
10
Range
0 ~ 630 A
Default 10
Step
1A
Set the minimum current value to detect the current unbalance element.
If load current is smaller this level, then current unbalance status point
does not maked.
EVRC2A-N6,NT.
118
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBV Func (Option)

> [POWER QUALITY]
>UBV Func: Disable
>UBV Pickup:
30
>UBV Duration: 4.0
Disable, Enable
Range
Default Disable
Step
It is to set event recording of voltage unbalance enable or disable.

EVRC2A-N6,NT.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBV Pickup (Option)

> [POWER QUALITY]
>UBV Func: Disable
>UBV Pickup:
30
>UBV Duration: 4.0
1 ~ 100 %
Range
Default 30
Step
1%
Set a detect level of voltage unbalance for Power Quality.

Voltage unbalance is calculated by following formula.
UVrate =
V2
100
V1

EVRC2A-N6,NT.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBV Duration (Option)

> [POWER QUALITY]
>UBV Func: Disable
>UBV Pickup:
30
>UBV Duration: 4.0
Range
0.1 ~ 60.0 sec
Default 4.0
Step
0.1 sec
Set a detect time of voltage unbalance.

EVRC2A-N6,NT.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
119
7. PROTECTION
Protective Elements Block diagram - ANSI Designations
Figure 7-1. Protective Elements Block Diagram - ANSI Designations
120
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Protective Elements - ANSI Designations

Table 7-1. Protective Elements -ANSI Designations
Protective Elements
ANSI Designations
Four shot recloser
79
Phase fast time overcurrent
51P1
Ground fast time overcurrent
51G1
Negative sequence fast time overcurrent
46(51)-1
Phase delay time overcurrent
51P2
Ground delay time overcurrent
51G2
Negative sequence delay time overcurrent
46(51)-2
Sensitive Earth Fault protection
51SEF
Phase directional time control
67P
Ground directional time control
67G
Negative sequence directional time control
67I2
Directional Sensitive Earth Fault
67SEF
Phase instantaneous high current trip
50P1
Ground instantaneous high current trip
50G1
Negative sequence instantaneous high current trip
46(50)1
Phase High current trip lockout
50P2
Ground High current trip lockout
50G2
Negative sequence High current trip lockout
46(50)2
Under voltage 1
27-1
Under voltage 2
27-2
Over voltage 1
59-1
Over voltage 2
59-2
Under frequency
81U
Over frequency
81O
Synchronism check
25
Cold load pickup

Sequence coordination
Loss of Phase
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
121
7.1. Reclose (79)

After a fault has occurred, the Reclose element closes the recloser when the programmed reclose
interval time expires. The number of operation lockout setting is programmed one to five, and
each reclose shot has its own separate reclose interval timer.
If the fault is permanent and the recloser continues to trip and reclose, the Reclose element will
continue to increment the operating counter. If this continues to the maximum number of the
operating lockout programmed in the Reclose element, the reclose logic lockouts.
If the fault is transient, then the reclose logic is reset by the reset logic.
The reclosing element can be disabled in the Primary, Alternate settings by one operating lockout
or by [RECLOSE ENABLED] push button on user interface panel.
The Reclose Element should be enabled to the following settings.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Lockout-PHA
[OPERATIONS]
>Lockout-PHA:
Lockout-GND:
Lockout-SEF:
Range
4
4
4
1~5
Default 4
Step
Select the total number of the phase trip operations.

This setting is used to change the total number of the phase trip
operations.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Lockout-GND

[OPERATIONS]
Lockout-PHA:
>Lockout-GND:
Lockout-SEF:
Range
4
4
4
1~5
Default 4
Step
Select the total number of the ground trip operations.

This setting is used to change the total number of the ground trip
operations.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Lockout-SEF

[OPERATIONS]
Lockout-PHA:
Lockout-GND:
>Lockout-SEF:
Range
4
4
4
1~5
Default 4
Step
Select the total number of the SEF trip operations.

This setting is used to change the total number of the SEF trip
operations
122
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Lockout-NEQ

[OPERATIONS]
Lockout-GND:
Lockout-SEF:
>Lockout-NEQ:
Range
4
4
4
1~5
Default 4
Step
Select the total number of the negative sequence trip operations.

This setting is used to change the total number of the negative sequence
trip operations.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Fast Curve-PHA

[OPERATIONS]
Lockout-GND:
Lockout-SEF:
>Fast Curve-PHA:
Range
4
4
2
0~5
Default 2
Step
Select the number of the phase fast curve operations.

This setting is used to change the number of the phase fast curve
operations.
The difference between setting [OPERATION] Lockout-PHA and
setting [OPERATION] Fast Curve-PHA is the number of remaining
phase delay curve operations.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Fast Curve-GND

[OPERATIONS]
Lockout-SEF:
Fast Curve-PHA:
>Fast Curve-GND:
Range
4
2
2
0~5
Default 2
Step
Select a number for the ground fast curve operations.

This setting is used to change the number of the ground fast curve
operations.
The difference between setting [OPERATION] Lockout-GND and
setting [OPERATION] Fast Curve-GND is the number of remaining
ground delay curve operations.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Fast Curve-NEQ

[OPERATIONS]
Fast Curve-PHA:
Fast Curve-GND:
>Fast Curve-NEQ:
Range
2
2
2
0~5
Default 2
Step
Select a number for the negative sequence fast curve operations.

This setting is used to change the number of the negative sequence fast
curve operations.
The difference between setting [OPERATION] Lockout-NEQ and
setting [OPERATION] Fast Curve-NEQ is the number of remaining
negative sequence delay curve operations.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
123
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / Reclose 1

[INTERVALS]
>Reclose 1:
0.60
Reclose 2:
2.00
Reclose 3:
15.00
Range
0.50 ~ 600.00 sec(prior to Ver 6.11 of EVRC2A)

0.10 ~ 600.00 sec(from Ver 6.11 of EVRC2A)
Default 0.60
Step
0.01 sec
This setting is used to change the first reclose interval time between the
first trip operation and the close operation.
[INTERVALS]
Reclose 1:
0.60
>Reclose 2:
2.00
Reclose 3:
15.00
Range
1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 2.00
Step
0.01 sec

[INTERVALS]
Reclose 1:
0.60
Reclose 2:
2.00
>Reclose 3:
15.00
Range
1.00 ~ 600.00sec
Default 15.00
Step
0.01

[INTERVALS]
Reclose 2:
2.00
Reclose 3:
15.00
>Reclose 4:
15.00
Range
1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 15.00
Step
0.01 sec
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / Reset T(AR)

[INTERVALS]
Reclose 3:
15.00
Reclose 4:
15.00
>Reset T(AR): 30.00
Range
1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 30.00
Step
0.01 sec
Select Reset time for auto reclose.

The Reset time for auto reclose is used for the recloser to automatically
reclose.
Traditionally, the Reset time for auto reclose setting is used to set time
for a delay longer than the incomplete sequence.
If any overcurrent elements are picked up, the reset timer is reloaded.
Reset timer can only count if all the overcurrent elements are cleared.
124
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / Reset T(LO)

[INTERVALS]
Reclose 4:
15.00
Reset T(AR): 30.00
>Reset T(LO): 10.00
Range
1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 10.00
Step
0.01 sec
Select the Reset time for lockout.

The auto reclose logic is disabled for a setting time delay after the
recloser is manually/remotely closed. This prevents a fault from manual
reclosing. This delay must be longer than the trip time delay for any
protection not blocked after manual closing.
If no overcurrent trip occurs after a manual close and this timer expires,
the auto reclose logic automatically resets.
Traditionally, the Reset Time from lockout setting is set shorter than the
Reset time for auto reclose setting.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / C/P Wait

[INTERVALS]
Reset T(AR): 30.00
Reset T(LO):
10.0
>C/P Wait:
60.00
Range
1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 60.00
Step
0.01 sec
Select the close power waiting time.

This timer is used to set the close power waiting time delay allowed to
reclose. It is activated when the reclose logic is in the reclose cycle
state. If this timer expires, the reclose logic is locked out.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
125
7.1.1. Lockout
The lockout state occurs under any of the following conditions :
y
After a fault of distribution systems, the RECLOSE ENABLED LED in user interface panel
is not lighted(ON).
When the high current lockout has occurred.
The recloser is manually closed and a fault occurs before the expiration of the reset time.
When recloser is manually opened.
After TRIP occurs, the fault current is not removed or the reclosers 52a contacts do not
change status of the recloser opened.
The close power waiting time delay has expired.
The Lockout State is cleared when the recloser has been manually closed by local/remote control
and the reset time has expired.
The following diagram shows the typical full protection sequence containing 2F2D (two fast and
two delay) operations followed by lockout.
AMP
FAULT
CURRENT
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
* LOCK-OUT *
PICKUP
CURRENT
NORMAL
CURRENT
TIME
(1) 1st Trip - 1st TCC
(2) 1st Reclose Interval Time
(3) 2nd Trip - 2nd TCC
(4) 2nd Reclose Interval Time
(5) 3rd Trip - 3rd TCC
(6) 3rd Reclose Interval Time
(7) 4th Trip - 4th TCC

Figure 7-2. Protection sequence containing 2F2D operations followed by lockout
126
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7.1.2. Reset
If the faulted current is cleared before the lockout condition, the reclosing sequence
automatically reset after passing the reset time interval.
If the fault condition occurs again during the reset time, the recloser will operate lockout after the
completion of the remaining sequence.
The following block diagram shows the reset sequence operation after the 3rd reclosing as the
fault current is cleared.
AMP
FAULT
CURRENT
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
AUTO RESET
TIME
* RESET *
PICKUP
CURRENT
NOMAL
CURRENT
TIME
(1) 1st Trip - 1st TCC
(2) 1st Reclose Interval Time
(3) 2nd Trip - 2nd TCC
(4) 2nd Reclose Interval Time
(5) 3rd Trip - 3rd TCC

Figure 7-3. Reset Sequence operation after the 3rd reclosing as the fault current is cleared
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
127
7.2. Phase (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrents (51P)

The EVRC2A has two phase time overcurrent elements. The phase time overcurrent element
contained in the EVR2A, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs.
The phase time overcurrent element is the most commonly used as a protective element for
distribution systems and also used in both down-line and back-up recloser protection. The phase
time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus current for tripping that is used for an
inverse time curve characteristic coordinated with current pickup value, curve type, time dial,
time adder, minimum response time setting and reset type. This inverse characteristic means that
time overcurrent element operates slowly on small values of current above the pickup value and
operates faster when current increases significantly above the pickup value. The phase time
overcurrent element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and [PROTECTION
ENABLED] in user interface panel.
Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the phase time overcurrent element to
respectively coordinate with other protection elements in the EVRC2A and other external
devices on the distribution system. ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER and non-standard time current
curves are included in the EVRC2A.
A User Programmable curve option is also available for user to allow creating customs time
current curves for more enhanced coordination than the standard curve types.
The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The phase time delay reset mode applies to
the ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with other
instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the distribution
system. In the instantaneous mode, the time overcurrent element will reset instantaneously when
the measured current level drops below the pickup setting for one cycle.
If the recloser is closed by pressing the CLOSE button on the front panel, or by an remote
control or via SCADA, the phase time overcurrent element is prevented from tripping for a
period specified by the Cold load pickup scheme.
128
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Phase Pickup Current Setup

The following setting is used to program the phase pickup current.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / Phase
[PICKUP CURRENT(A)]
>Phase:
500
Ground:
250
S.E.F:
OFF
Range
OFF, 10 ~ 1600A
Default 500
Step
1A
Set the pickup current of Phase Time Overcurrent elements.
Phase Fast Time Overcurrent Setup

The following setting is used to program the phase fast time overcurrent element.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Function
[PHASE FAST]
>Function:
TRIP
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Curve:
ANSI-STI
Range
TRIP, TR&AR
Default TRIP
Step
If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts

a TRIP condition, Trip operates.
If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a TRIP condition, TRIP and any other selected output relays
operate.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Relays(0-8)

[PHASE FAST]
Function:
TRIP
>Relays(0-8):
OFF
Curve:
ANSI-STI
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates a Trip.
Maximum 4 of Relay outputs can be selected to operate output signal.
0000(off) : No Output Relay is selected.
1234 : Operate output signal through 1, 2, 3, 4 Output Relay.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
129
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Curve

[PHASE FAST]
Function:
TRIP
Relays(0-8):
OFF
>Curve:
ANSI-STI
Range
ANSI-MI, ANSI-NI, , KG(165)
Default ANSI-STI
Step
Select the desired curve type :

ANSI : Moderately, Normally, Very, Extremely, Short Inverse,
Definite Time(1s ,10s)
User programmable curves : U1,U2,U3,U4
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Time Dial

[PHASE FAST]
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Curve:
ANSI-STI
>Time Dial:
0.50
Range
0.05 ~ 15.00
Default 0.50
Step
0.01
A time dial set point allows shifting of the selected base curve in the
vertical time axis.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Time Adder

[PHASE FAST]
Curve:
ANSI-STI
Time Dial:
0.50
>Time Adder:
0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
An additional time delay is added to the time delay resulting from the
time overcurrent curve function.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / M.R.T

[PHASE FAST]
Time Dial:
0.50
Time Adder:
0.00
>M.R.T:
0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
The minimum time delay that will occur between pickup and trip, even
if the time delay is shorter.
This function can be useful for other protective device and line fuse
coordination.
130
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Reset Method

[PHASE FAST]
Time Adder:
0.00
M.R.T:
0.00
>Reset Method: INST
INST, LINEAR
Range
Default INST
Step
Overcurrent tripping time calculations are made with an internal energy

Capacity memory variable. When this variable indicates that the energy
capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent trip is generated. If less
than 100% is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below
the dropout threshold of the pickup value, the variable must be reduced.
Two methods of this resetting operation are available, Instantaneous
and Linear. The Instantaneous selection is intended for applications
with other relays, such as most static units, which set the energy
capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the reset
threshold. The Linear selection can be used where the relay must
coordinate with electromechanical units.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Low Set Definite Time

[PHASE FAST]
>M.R.T:
0.00
>Reset Method: INST
>Low Set DT:
OFF
OFF, 1 ~ 600sec
Range
Default OFF
Step
1sec
Low set definite time is used to restrict a trip time to be a definite time
adjacent to a pickup current by T-C curve. When the trip time is greater
than the low set definite time, low set definite time is applied for
operation.
NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.03 of EVRC2A-N6,
NT.
Phase Delay Time Overcurrent Setup

The phase delay time overcurrent settings process is very similarly to the phase fast time
overcurrent.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
131
7.3. Ground (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrent (51G)

The EVRC2A has two ground time overcurrent elements. The ground time overcurrent element
in the EVRC2A is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The
ground time overcurrent element is the most commonly used as a protective element for
distribution systems and also used in both down-line and back-up recloser protection. The
ground time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus current for tripping that is used for
an inverse time curve characteristic coordinated with current pickup value, curve type, time dial,
time adder, minimum response time setting and reset type. This inverse characteristic means that
time overcurrent element operates slowly on small values of current above the pickup value and
operates faster when current increases significantly above the pickup value. The ground time
overcurrent element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and both [PROTECTION
ENABLED] and [GROUND ENABLED] in user interface panel.
Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the ground time overcurrent element to
closely coordinate with other protection elements within the EVRC2A and other external devices
on the distribution system. ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER and non-standard time current curves are
included in the EVRC2A.
A User Programmable curve option is also available allowing the user to create customer time
current curves for more enhanced coordination than the standard curve types.
The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The ground time delay reset mode applies to
the ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with other
instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the distribution
system. In the instantaneous mode the time overcurrent element will reset instantaneously when
the current level measured by the EVRC2A drops below the pickup setting for one cycle.
control or via SCADA, the ground time overcurrent element is prevented from tripping for a
period specified by the Cold load pickup scheme.
132
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Ground Pickup Current Setup

The following setting is used to program the phase pickup current.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / Ground
[PICKUP CURRENT(A)]
>Phase:
500
>Ground:
250
S.E.F:
OFF
Range
OFF, 10 ~ 1600A
Default 250
Step
1A
Set the pickup current of Ground Time Overcurrent elements.
Ground Fast Time Overcurrent Setup

The following setting is used to program the ground fast time overcurrent element.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Function
[GROUND FAST]
>Function:
TRIP
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Curve:
ANSI-STI
Range
TRIP, TR&AR
Default TRIP
Step

a TRIP condition, which will operate the Trip.
asserts a TRIP&AR condition, it trips and alarms.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Relays(0-8)

[GROUND FAST]
Function:
TRIP
>Relays(0-8):
OFF
Curve:
ANSI-STI
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Curve

[GROUND FAST]
Function:
TRIP
Relays(0-8):
OFF
>Curve:
ANSI-STI
Range
Default ANSI-STI
Step

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
133
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Time Dial

[GROUND FAST]
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Curve:
ANSI-STI
>Time Dial:
0.50
Range
0.05 ~ 15.00
Default 0.50
Step
0.01
A time dial set point allows shifting of the selected base curve in the
vertical time axis.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Time Adder

[GROUND FAST]
Curve:
ANSI-STI
Time Dial:
0.50
>Time Adder:
0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / M.R.T

[GROUND FAST]
Time Dial:
0.50
Time Adder:
0.00
>M.R.T:
0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
if the time delay is shorter. This function can be useful for other
protective device and line fuse coordination.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Reset Method

[GROUND FAST]
Time Adder:
0.00
M.R.T:
0.00
>Reset Method: INST
Range
INST, LINEAR
Default INST
Step

134
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Low Set Definite Time

[GROUND FAST]
>M.R.T:
0.00
>Reset Method: INST
>Low Set DT:
OFF
OFF, 1 ~ 600sec
Range
Default OFF
Step
1sec
operation.
NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.03 of EVRC2A-N6,
NT.
Ground Delay Time Overcurrent Setup

The ground delay time overcurrent settings process is very similarly to the ground fast time
overcurrent.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
135
7.4. Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF)

The sensitive earth fault (SEF) is applicable to systems that have restricted current flow for phase
to earth fault. The SEF is not applicable to the case in 4 wire multi-earthed systems. The
sensitivity of SEF element for non-earthed systems is dependent upon available fault current and
the accuracy of CTs. For SEF element, EVRC2A has the separate SEF terminal on side panel.
This input can be connected in series with the provided phase CTs (standard) or connected to a
separate window type ZCT.
The SEF element provides a definite time delay versus current. The SEF element is enabled in
the Primary, Alternate settings and both [PROTECTION ENABLED] and [SEF ENABLED]
in user interface panel.
For user systems, a directional SEF is available. The directional control is polarized by a zero
sequence voltage(V0). The VD or PTs should be connected Wye-grounded.
The SEF element in the following three settings should be enabled.
SEF Pickup Current Setup

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / S.E.F
[PICKUP CURRENT(A)]
>Phase:
500
>Ground:
250
>S.E.F:
OFF
Range*
Default
OFF, 4 ~ 160A (prior to Ver 6.15 of EVRC2A)

OFF, 1 ~ 160A (from Ver 6.15 of EVRC2A)
OFF
Step
1A
Set the pickup current of SEF element.

NOTE : The user shall request a CT that satisfies the relevant
accuracy when setting below 2A so that the SEF element
operates properly.
NOTE : For the products that are dispatched with ZCT installed, the
setting range of this item is OFF, 0.1~16.0 (0.1A Step). It
is possible to check whether the product is dispatched with
ZCT installed by checking MAIN MENU/ STATUS/
CONTROL TYPE menu. Refer to 9.4. Control Type.
136
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
SEF Element Setup

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / SEF ELEMENT / Function
[ SEF ELEMENT ]
>Function:
TRIP
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Time Delay:
1.00
Range
TRIP, TR&AR
Default TRIP
Step

asserts a TRIP & AR condition, it trips and alarms.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / SEF ELEMENT / Relays(0-8)

[ SEF ELEMENT ]
Function:
TRIP
>Relays(0-8):
OFF
Time Delay:
1.00
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / SEF ELEMENT / Time Delay

[ SEF ELEMENT ]
Function:
TRIP
Relays(0-8):
OFF
>Time Delay:
1.00
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 1.00
Step
0.01 sec
The Time delay of Sensitive Earth Fault setting programs a definite

time delay for the Sensitive Earth Fault. If set to zero, phase high
current trip operates instantaneously.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
137
7.5. Negative Sequence (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrent (46)

The EVRC2A has two negative sequence time overcurrent elements. The negative sequence
element measures the amount of unbalance current in the system. The negative sequence
overcurrent element can also be used to detect phase to ground and two phase ground faults. The
negative sequence time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus current for tripping
using that an inverse time curve characteristic is operated to coordinate, current pickup value,
curve type, time dial, time adder, minimum response time setting, and reset type.
The negative sequence time overcurrent element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and
[PROTECTION ENABLED] on user interface panel.
Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the negative sequence time overcurrent
element to closely coordinate with other protection elements in the EVRC2A and other external
devices on the distribution system.
The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The negative sequence time delay reset
mode applies to the ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to
coordinate with other instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective
equipment on the distribution system. In the instantaneous mode, the time overcurrent element
will reset instantaneously when the measured current level drops below the pickup setting for
one cycle.
control or via SCADA, the negative sequence time overcurrent element is prevented from
tripping for a period specified by the Cold load pickup scheme.
NEG Pickup Current Setup

The following setting is used to program the NEQ pickup current.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / NEG Seq
[PICKUP CURRENT(A)]
Ground:
250
S.E.F:
OFF
>NEG Seq:
OFF
Range
OFF, 10 ~ 1600A
Default OFF
Step
1A
Set the pickup current of NEG Seq Time Overcurrent elements.
138
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Negative Sequence Fast Time Overcurrent Setup

The following setting is used to program the negative sequence fast time overcurrent element.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Function
[NEG SEQ FAST]
>Function:
TRIP
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Curve:
ANSI-STI
Range
TRIP, TR&AR
Default TRIP
Step

asserts a TRIP condition, TRIP and any other selected output relays
operate.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Relays(0-8)

[NEG SEQ FAST]
Function:
TRIP
>Relays(0-8):
OFF
Curve:
ANSI-STI
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Curve

[NEG SEQ FAST]
Function:
TRIP
Relays(0-8):
OFF
>Curve:
ANSI-STI
Range
Default ANSI-STI
Step

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Time Dial

[NEG SEQ FAST]
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Curve:
ANSI-SI
>Time Dial:
0.50
Range
0.05 ~ 15.00
Default 0.50
Step
0.01
A time dial setpoint allows shifting of the selected base curve in the
vertical time axis.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
139
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Time Adder

[NEG SEQ FAST]
Curve:
ANSI-STI
Time Dial:
0.50
>Time Adder:
0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / M.R.T

[NEG SEQ FAST]
Time Dial:
0.50
Time Adder:
0.00
>M.R.T:
0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
if the time delay is shorter. This function can be useful for other
protective device and line fuse coordination.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Reset Method

[NEG SEQ FAST]
Time Adder:
0.00
M.R.T:
0.00
>Reset Method: INST
Range
INST, LINEAR
Default INST
Step

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Low Set Definite Time
[NEG SEQ FAST]
>M.R.T:
0.00
>Reset Method: INST
>Low Set DT:
OFF
Range
OFF, 1 ~ 600sec
Default OFF
Step
1sec
operation.
NOTE : This setting is supported from vesion 6.03 of EVRC2AN6, NT.
140
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Negative Sequence Delay Time Overcurrent Setup

The negative sequence delay time overcurrent settings process is very similarly to the negative
sequence fast time overcurrent.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
141
7.6. Phase High Current Trip (50P-1)

The EVRC2A has a phase high current trip element. The phase high current trip element in the
EVRC2A, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The phase
high current trip element provides a definite time delay versus current.
The operating time of phase high current trip element should be set for equal to or faster than the
phase time overcurrent elements. The phase high current trip element is enabled in the Primary,
Alternate settings and [PROTECTION ENABLED] on user interface panel.
Phase high current trip is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme.
The phase high current trip element in the following five settings should be enabled for phase
high current trip.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-PHA / Function
[ H/C TRIP-PHA ]
>Function:
OFF
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Pickup(A):
4000
Range
OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
Default OFF
Step
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-PHA / Relays(0-8)

[ H/C TRIP-PHA ]
Function:
OFF
>Relays(0-8):
OFF
Pickup(A):
4000
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
Selects the required relays to operate when the feature generates a Trip.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-PHA / Pickup(A)

[ H/C TRIP-PHA ]
Function:
OFF
Relays(0-8):
OFF
>Pickup(A):
4000
Range
10 ~ 20000 A
Default 4000
Step
1A
Set the pickup current of Phase High Current Trip Element.

This value is the minimum operating current of Phase High Current
Trip Element.
142
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-PHA / Time Delay

[ H/C TRIP-PHA ]
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Pickup(A):
4000
>Time Delay:
0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
The Time delay of phase high current trip setting programs a definite
time delay for the phase high current trip. If set to zero, phase high
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-PHA / Active Trip

[ H/C TRIP-PHA ]
Pickup(A):
4000
Time Delay:
0.00
>Active Trip:
OFF
Range
OFF, 1 ~ 5
Default OFF
Step
If Active Trip = OFF, the feature is not operate.

If Active Trip = 2, then phase high current trip is enabled for the
second trip operation and every following trip operation.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
143
7.7. Ground High Current Trip (50G-1)

The EVRC2A has a ground high current trip element. The ground high current trip element in the
EVRC2A is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The ground
high current trip element provides a definite time delay versus current.
The operating time of ground high current trip overcurrent element should be set for equal to or
faster than the ground time overcurrent elements. The ground high current trip element is enabled
in the Primary, Alternate settings both [PROTECTION ENABLED] and [GROUND
ENABLED] in user interface panel. Ground high current trip is not affected by the cold load
pickup scheme.
The ground high current trip element in the following five settings should be enabled for ground
high current trip.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-GND / Function
[ H/C TRIP-GND ]
>Function:
OFF
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Pickup(A):
4000
Range
OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
Default OFF
Step

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-GND / Relays(0-8)

[ H/C TRIP-GND ]
Function:
OFF
>Relays(0-8):
OFF
Pickup(A):
4000
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-GND / Pickup(A)

[ H/C TRIP-GND ]
Function:
OFF
Relays(0-8):
OFF
>Pickup(A):
4000
Range
10 ~ 20000 A
Default 4000
Step
1A
Set the pickup current of Ground High Current Trip Element.

This value is the minimum operating current of Ground High Current
Trip Element.
144
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-GND / Time Delay

[ H/C TRIP-GND ]
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Pickup(A):
4000
>Time Delay:
0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-GND / Active Trip

[ H/C TRIP-GND ]
Pickup(A):
4000
Time Delay:
0.00
>Active Trip:
OFF
Range
OFF, 1 ~ 5
Default OFF
Step

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
145
7.8. Negative Sequence High Current Trip (46(50)-1)

The negative sequence high current trip in the EVRC2A is set based on CT secondary current as
connected to the current inputs. The negative sequence high current trip element provides a
definite time delay versus current.
The operating time of negative sequence high current trip element should be set equal to or faster
than the negative sequence time overcurrent elements. The negative sequence high current trip
element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and [PROTECTION] on user interface
panel.
The negative sequence high current trip is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme.
The ground high current trip element in the following five settings should be enabled for
negative sequence high current trip.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Function
[ H/C TRIP-NEQ ]
>Function:
OFF
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Pickup(A):
4000
Range
OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
Default OFF
Step

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Relays(0-8)

[ H/C TRIP-NEQ ]
Function:
OFF
>Relays(0-8):
OFF
Pickup(A):
4000
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Pickup(A)

[ H/C TRIP-NEQ ]
Function:
OFF
Relays(0-8):
OFF
>Pickup(A):
4000
Range
10 ~ 20000 A
Default 4000
Step
1A
Set the pickup current of Negative Seq. High Current Trip Element.
This value is the minimum operating current of Negative Seq. High
Current Trip Element.
146
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Time Delay

[ H/C TRIP-NEQ ]
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Pickup(A):
4000
>Time Delay:
0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Active Trip

[ H/C TRIP-NEQ ]
Pickup(A):
4000
Time Delay:
0.00
>Active Trip:
OFF
Range
OFF, 1 ~ 5
Default OFF
Step

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
147
7.9. Phase High Current Lockout (50P-2)

The EVRC2A has a phase high current lockout element. The phase high current lockout element
in the EVRC2A is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The
phase high current lockout element provides a definite time delay versus current.
When high current lockout element is enabled, high current lockout element is operated prior to
any other phase protection elements. If a fault current is higher than the pickup setting value,
Lockout is operated.
The phase high current lockout element can be set by a number of its active trip that is applied to
the full operation to lockout, time delay and fault current.
This function is very useful to prevent widespread line faults due to reclosing operations in case
of permanent fault.
The operating time of phase high current lockout element should be set for equal to or faster than
and phase high current trip element. The phase high current lockout element is enabled in the
Primary, Alternate setting and [PROTECTION ENABLED] in user interface panel.
The phase high current lockout element is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme.
The phase high current lockout element in the following five setting should be enabled for phase
high current trip.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Function
[ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ]
>Function:
OFF
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Pickup(A):
8000
Range
OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
Default OFF
Step

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Relays(0-8)

[ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ]
Function:
OFF
>Relays(0-8):
OFF
Pickup(A):
8000
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
148
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Pickup(A)

[ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ]
Function:
OFF
Relays(0-8):
OFF
>Pickup(A):
8000
Range
10 ~ 20000 A
Default 8000
Step
1A
Set the pickup current of Ground High Current Lockout Element.

Lockout Element.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Time Delay

[ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ]
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Pickup(A):
8000
>Time Delay:
0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Active Trip

[ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ]
Pickup(A):
8000
Time Delay:
0.00
>Active Trip:
OFF
Range
OFF, 1 ~ 5
Default OFF
Step

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
149
7.10. Ground High Current Lockout (50G-2)

The EVRC2A has a ground high current lockout element. The ground high current lockout
element in the EVRC2A, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs.
The ground high current lockout element provides a definite time delay versus current.
The operating time of ground high current lockout overcurrent element should be set for equal to
or faster than the ground high current trip element. The ground high current lockout element is
enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and both [PROTECTION ENABLED] and
[GROUND ENABLED] in user interface panel. The ground high current lockout is not affected
by the cold load pickup scheme.
The ground high current lockout element in the following five settings should be enabled for
ground high current lockout.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Function
[ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ]
>Function:
OFF
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Pickup(A):
8000
Range
OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
Default OFF
Step

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Relays(0-8)

[ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ]
Function:
OFF
>Relays(0-8):
OFF
Pickup(A):
8000
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Pickup(A)

[ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ]
Function:
OFF
Relays(0-8):
OFF
>Pickup(A):
8000
Range
10 ~ 20000 A
Default 8000
Step
1A
Set the pickup current of Ground High Current Lockout Element.

Lockout Element.
150
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Time Delay

[ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ]
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Pickup(A):
8000
>Time Delay:
0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Active Trip

[ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ]
Pickup(A):
8000
Time Delay:
0.00
>Active Trip:
OFF
Range
OFF, 1 ~ 5
Default OFF
Step

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
151
7.11. Negative Sequence High Current Lockout (46(50)-2)

The EVRC2A has a negative sequence high current lockout element. Negative sequence high
current lockout element in the EVRC2A is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the
current inputs. The negative sequence high current lockout element provides a definite time
delay characteristic versus current.
The negative sequence high current lockout element should be set equal to or faster than the
negative sequence high current trip element. The negative sequence high current lockout element
is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and [PROTECTION ENABLED] on user interface
panel.
Negative sequence high current lockout is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme.
The negative sequence high current lockout element in the following five settings should be
enabled for the negative sequence high current lockout.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ / Function
[ H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ ]
>Function:
OFF
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Pickup(A):
8000
Range
OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
Default OFF
Step

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ / Relays(0-8)

[ H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ ]
Function:
OFF
>Relays(0-8):
OFF
Pickup(A):
8000
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
152
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ / Pickup(A)

[ H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ ]
Function:
OFF
Relays(0-8):
OFF
>Pickup(A):
8000
Range
10 ~ 20000 A
Default 8000
Step
1A
Set the pickup current of Negative Seq. High Current Lockout Element.
This value is the minimum operating current of Negative Seq. High
Current Lockout Element.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ / Time Delay

[ H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ ]
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Pickup(A):
8000
>Time Delay:
0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ / Active Trip

[ H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ ]
Pickup(A):
8000
Time Delay:
0.00
>Active Trip:
OFF
Range
OFF, 1 ~ 5
Default OFF
Step

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
153
7.12. Cold Load Pickup

The cold load pickup function is used to prevent the recloser from incorrectly operating caused
by the restoration of load supply or the cold load current of load side. EVRC2A provides
CLPU-Type 1 to prevent the recloser from operating wrong by instantaneous inrush current
occurring by the closing of device on a power line and CLPU-Type 2 to prevent protection
elements from operating wrong by the cold load current caused by applying voltage to a
transformer, a reactor or a long-distance line.
7.12.1. Cold Load Pickup Type 1

The settings of CLPU-Type 1 are separated and set respectively for phase, ground, SEF or
negative phase over current element.
In the state of the function to restrain the inrush current activated, the overcurrent protection
element will be operated under settings of CLPU-Type 1 function at the restoration of load
supply.
NOTE:
According to setting of Make use I, the condition to decide the restoration of load supply will
be changed. If YES is set, the decision is made when the load current becomes over 2A. If
NO is set, the decision is made when a recloser is closed (52A) by local or remote control.
When a distributed system is closed after long-time outage, the inrush current over overcurrent
pickup level may occur. At occurrence of the cold load pickup, EVRC2A increases the pickup
level of overcurrent element during a certain period of time, the Fast overcurrent protection
element is not operated and the Delay overcurrent protection element is always operated
regardless of the cold load pickup function. (The High Current Trip and High Current Lockout
are always operated regardless of the cold load pickup function)
If a fault occurs on distributed system, an overcurrent protection element is operated by the cold
load pickup function and a recloser becomes lockout after oneshot trip regardless of total number
of shots.
A power is lost and then after certain outage time, the algorithm of cold load pickup function is
applied at the restoration of load supply. If the Make use 1 is set to be YES, the algorithm
154
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
is applied when a load current becomes 0 and then it is restored after certain outage time. If NO
is set, the algorithm is applied when a recloser is opened and then after certain outage time, the
recloser is closed manually. If the fault current over the cold load pickup level occurs, the
protection element by the cold load pickup function is operated immediately.
If the power loss (opening or load current loss) is sustained for a long time more than certain
outage time, the pickup current of time overcurrent element is changed to be the setting value of
the cold load pickup current. After the restoration of load supply (manually closing or restoration
of load current), protection functions are normally operated when the Restore minimum time
(RMT) is expired.
Trip Area
Time
Non Trip Area
Delay Curve
Current
Overcurrent
Pickup Level
Cold load
Pickup Level
Figure 7-4. The Cold Load Pickup Characteristic

The cold load pickup function is operated according to the following rules.
The setting to use the cold load pickup function is set to be ON (set to TRIP or TR&AR), the
cold load pickup level is preset and then the cold load pickup function is activated at manual
close or restoration of load current.
If the level of over current occurring at the restoration of load supply is over the cold load
pickup current, the Lockout is done by protection function after oneshot trip (Refer the Inrush
Current 1 in Figure 7-5. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic).
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
155
If the over current is below cold load pickup current and overcurrent pickup current, protection
functions are not operated during a period of Restore minimum Time (RMT), (Refer the Inrush
Current 2 in Figure 7-5. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic). After RMT, the
protection functions are operated. However, if the over current is dropped below overcurrent
pickup current during the RMT, the cold load pickup function is reset after reset time (Refer the
Inrush Current 3 in Figure 7-5. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic).
Current
Outage time
Restore Minimum Time
Inrush current 1
Trip
CLPU
Pickup Level
Inrush current 2
Trip
Overcurrent
Pickup Level
Inrush current 3
Time
Figure 7-5. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic

If high current trip and high current lockout functions are activated and the fault current is higher
than the current setting of High current trip and high current lockout, the high current trip and
high current lockout functions will be operated prior to the cold load pickup function.
156
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7.12.2. Cold Load Pickup Type 2

In the state of cold load, this type is used to restrain the operation of protection functions to over
current occurring by change of load (the close of a switch on long-distance line, incoming heavy
load etc.). This function to restrain protection functions rises or drops the pickup level of time
overcurrent element during certain time (E-CLP time) defined by a user.
Over Current Pickup Level Step Up
At power loss (a recloser is opened or a load current is 0A), the current of Over Current Pickup is
risen as follows.
Without Supply Time
Operational Cold Load Multi' = 1 +

( E CLP Multi' 1)
E CLP Time
As example, when E-CLP Multi and E-CLT Time are set to be 3.0 and 60min respectively, over
30 min after power loss, the applied cold load multiple is 2. If the minimum working currentis
set to be 200A, the current of Over Current Pickup becomes 400A, twice as much as the
minimum working current. In addition, after 60 min, the cold load multiple is fixed to be 3.
Over Current Pickup Level Step Down
If power is restored (manual closed or restoration of load current (over 2A)), the current of Over
Current Pickup is dropped with the same speed when rising until the cold load multiple becomes
1.
When E-CLP Multi and E-CLP Time are set to be 3.0 and 60 min respectively, the graph of the
cold load multiple in Figure 7-6. Cold Load Multipilier is shown as follows.
NOTE:
The risen level of overcurrent pickup by multiple of cold load is the pickup level to operate
overcurrent protection element. The standard current level of TC curve is a minimum working
current.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
157
Figure 7-6. Cold Load Multipilier
7.12.3. Cold Load Pickup Setup

The Cold Load Pickup feature in the following settings should be enabled.
CLPU COMMON Setup

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-COMMON/ Function
[CLPU-COMMON]
>Function:
TRIP
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Make use I:
NO
Range
OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
Default TRIP
Step

If function = Trip, the feature is operational.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-COMMON/ Relays

[CLPU-COMMON]
Function:
TRIP
>Relays(0-8):
OFF
Make use I:
NO
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
158
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-COMMON/ Make use I

[CLPU-COMMON]
Function:
TRIP
Relays(0-8):
OFF
>Make use I:
NO
NO,YES
Range
Default NO
Step
This setting changes the point of time to activate a cold load pickup
function.
If YES is set, the cold load pickup function is activated when a load
current is restored (over 2A).
If NO is set, the cold load pickup function is activated when a
recloser is manually closed by local or remote control.
CLPU-TYPE1 Setup
This setting is to restrain the inrush current occurring at restoration of load supply.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / PHA
[CLPU-TYPE1]
>PHA(A):
2000
GND(A):
2000
>SEF(A):
20
Range
10 ~ 20000A
Default 2000
Step
1A
Selects the raised pickup current for the phase overcurrent element
while cold load pickup feature is activated.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / GND

[CLPU-TYPE1]
>PHA(A):
2000
>GND(A):
2000
>SEF(A):
20
Range
10 ~ 20000A
Default 2000
Step
1A
Selects the raised pickup current for the ground overcurrent element
while cold load pickup feature is activated.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / SEF

[CLPU-TYPE1]
PHA(A):
2000
GND(A):
2000
>SEF(A):
20
Range* 4 ~ 2000A
Default
20
Step
1A
Selects the raised pickup current for the SEF overcurrent element while
cold load pickup feature is activated.
NOTE : For the products that are dispatched with ZCT installed, the
setting range of this item is 0.4~200.0A (0.1A Step). It is
possible to check whether the product is dispatched with
ZCT installed by checking MAIN MENU/ STATUS/
CONTROL TYPE menu. Refer to 9.4. Control Type.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
159
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1/ NEQ

[CLPU-TYPE1]
GND(A):
2000
SEF(A):
2000
>NEQ(A):
2000
Range
10 ~ 20000A
Default 2000
Step
1A
Selects the raised pickup current for the negative sequence overcurrent
element while cold load pickup feature is activated.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / Outage Time

[CLPU-TYPE1]
SEF(A):
2000
NEQ(A):
2000
>Outage Time:
10.0
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 10.0
Step
0.01 sec
Select the outage time required for a open of recloser to be considered

cold.
Figure 7-7. Outage Time Logic Diagram

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / RMT Time
[CLPU-TYPE1]
NEQ(A):
2.00
Outage Time:
10.0
>RMT Time:
5.00
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 5.00
Step
0.01 sec
Select the restore minimum time required for the inrush load.
The Restore Minimum Time have to raised pickup levels for
overcurrent detection from cold load pickup value back to nominal
pickup level.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / RMT Func-PHA

[CLPU-TYPE1]
Outage Time:
10.0
RMT Time:
5.00
>RMT Func-PHA:
ON
Range
OFF, ON
Default ON
Step
Set whether to use Phase Minimum operation current reset function.

ON : After recloser close and after Restore Minimum Time(RMT
time), Inrush Current Restraint algorithm is stopped and phase
overcurrent protection function operates(Pickup level is changed from
Cold load pickup to Overcurrent pickup level).
OFF : After recloser close and after Restore Minimum Time(RMT
time), Inrush current restraint algorithm remains. Lower than over
current pickup level shall be kept for Cold load reset time(Rst TimePHA set time) so that Inrush Current Restraint algorithm is stopped and
over current protection function operates.
160
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
. NOTE : RMT Func-GND, RMT Func-SEF and RMT Func-NEG, the same as RMT FuncPHA above.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / Reset Time
[CLPU-TYPE1]
RMT Func-SEF:
ON
RMT Func-NEQ:
ON
>Reset Time:
0.60
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 0.60
Step
0.01 sec
Select the cold load reset time required for the inrush load.
If the cold load currents drop below nominal pickup levels, the cold
load pickup feature is returned the normal sequence when the cold load
reset time expires.
CLPU-TYPE2 Setup
This setup is to rise or drop the current for Over Current Pickup of a protection element
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE2 / E-CLP Multi
[CLPU-TYPE2]
>E-CLP Multi:
2.0
E-CLP Time(m):
10
Range
0.0 (OFF),1.0~5.0
Default 2.0
Step
0.1
Set the multiple of cold load. If OFF is set, the cold load multiple is not
applied and the setting of minimum working current is always applied
for overcurrent pickup current.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE2/ E-CLP Time
[CLPU-TYPE2]
>E-CLP Multi:
2.0
>E-CLP Time(m):
10
Range
1~720min
Default 10
Step
Set the cold load time. During this set time, the overcurrent pickup
level is risen or dropped.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
161
7.13. Directional Controls (67)

The directional Controls provide time protection in the direction of power flow. The directional
Controls are necessary for the protection of multiple feeders, when it has the necessity of finding
faults in different directions. The directional controls are composed of phase, neutral, sensitive
ground, and negative sequence overcurrent elements.
If directional controls are selected, it will determine whether current flow in each phase is in
forward or reverse direction, as determined by the connection of the phase CTs, selected
Maximum Torque Angle (MTA), voltage and current phasors. To increase security of all
directional controls, add one power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect
operation.
The directional controls have each three settings. The directional controls settings can be
different in the Primary and Alternate settings.
NOTE : In case of VD(CVD or RVD) type Recloser, EVRC2A only measures voltages
without checking directional elements.
7.13.1. Phase Directional Controls (67P)

The positive sequence voltage V1 provides the direction of phase pole in the power system.
The phase direction is determined as comparing the positive sequence voltage(V1) to the
direction of the positive sequence current(I1). The maximum torque angle is set between 0 to
359 degree.
The factory default value for maximum torque angle has a lead of 300 degree over V1.
If the polarized voltage drops below minimum polarized voltage, the phase direction control will
lose direction and will not trip. Then any fault on the distribution line may trip due to the phase
overcurrent element, which is non-directional.
The phase direction control can be programmed for non-direction or to provide a trip for current
flow in the forward or reverse direction only.
Following diagram shows the phasor diagram for I1 directional polarization in the complex plane.
162
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Polarizing Referance
Voltage:
V1
T
ro
Ze
Typical Fault Angle
orq
e
Lin
ue
I1
M
um
im
ax
e
Lin
ue
q
r
o
Maximum Torque Angle :

set 300 degree
ard
rw
Fo
rse
ve
Re
Figure 7-8. Phasor Diagram for I1 Directional Polarization

The phase direction control in the following four settings should be enabled.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / PHASE DIRECTION / Type
[PHASE DIRECTION]
>Type:
OFF
M.T.A:
300
M.P.V:
0.20
Range
OFF, FOR, REV
Default OFF
Step
OFF : None direction

FOR : Forward direction
REV : Reverse direction
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / PHASE DIRECTION / M.T.A

[PHASE DIRECTION]
Type:
OFF
>M.T.A:
300
M.P.V:
0.20
Range
0 ~ 359 degree
Default 300
Step
1 degree
Enter the Maximum Torque Angle. The Maximum Torque Angle

setting determines the range of current direction for the polarizing
voltage.
For typical distribution systems, the faulted angle of the phase will be
approximately 3060 degree
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
163
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / PHASE DIRECTION / M.P.V

[PHASE DIRECTION]
Type:
OFF
M.T.A:
300
>M.P.V:
0.20
Range
0 ~ 1.25 xVT(secondary nominal voltage)
Default 0.20
Step
0.01
Enter the minimum polarizing voltage as a fraction of the secondary

nominal voltage.
PRIMARY SETTING/PROTECTION / DIRECTION / PHASE DIRECTION / BLOCK OC

[PHASE DIRECTION]
M.T.A:
300
M.P.V:
0.20
>BLOCK OC:
NO
Range
NO, YES
Default NO
Step
The BLOCK OC setting determines the overcurrent tripping conditions

when the polarizing voltage drops below minimum polarizing voltage.
If BLOCK OC = NO,
then tripping by the overcurrent elements will be permitted.
If BLOCK OC = YES,
then tripping by the overcurrent elements will be blocked.
NOTE )
EVRC2A version prior to 5.1 this setting is applied conversely.
For example, NO indicates that directional elements will be
blocked by M.P.V. YES indicates that directional elements will
be operated regardless of M.P.V.
7.13.2. Ground Directional Controls (67G)

The zero sequence voltage 3V0 provides the direction of ground control in the power system. The
ground direction is determined as comparing the zero sequence voltage(3V0) to the direction of
the zero sequence current(Ig). The Maximum Torque Angle is set between 0 to 359 degree.
The factory default value for maximum torque angle has a lead of 135 degree over 3V0.
If the polarized voltage drops below minimum polarized voltage, the ground direction control
will lose direction and will not trip. Then any fault on the distribution line may trip due to the
ground overcurrent element, which is non-directional.
The ground direction control can be programmed to either non-direction or provide a trip for
current flow in the forward or reverse direction only.
164
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
The following diagram shows the phasor diagram for Ig directional polarization in the complex
plane.
rq
ue
Li
n
-V0
To
im
um
Ig
To
ro
Ze
Fault Current
M
ax
ue
rq
Re
ve
rs
e
Fo
rw
ar
d
ne
Li
Voltage:
V0
Figure 7-9. Phasor Diagram for Ig Directional Polarization

The ground direction control in the following four settings should be enabled.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / GROUND DIRECTION / Type
[GROUND DIRECTION]
>Type:
OFF
M.T.A:
135
M.P.V:
0.20
Range
OFF, FOR, REV
Default OFF
Step

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
165
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / GROUND DIRECTION / M.T.A

[GROUND DIRECTION]
Type:
OFF
>M.T.A:
135
M.P.V:
0.20
Range
0 ~ 359 degree
Default 135
Step
1 degree
Enter the maximum torque angle, The maximum torque angle setting
determines the range of current direction for the polarized voltage.
For system with high-resistance grounding or floating neutrals, the
ground maximum torque angle will be approximately 135 degree.
For system with solidly grounded or resistively grounded the maximum
torque angle will be approximately 90 degree.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / PHASE DIRECTION / M.P.V

[GROUND DIRECTION]
Type:
OFF
M.T.A:
135
>M.P.V:
0.20
Range
Default 0.20
Step
0.01
Enter the minimum polarizing voltage.

For systems with high-resistance grounding or floating neutrals, this
M.P.V will be approximately 0.20 x VT.
For system with solidly grounded or resistively grounded the M.P.V
will be approximately 0.10 x VT.
PRIMARY SETTING/PROTECTION/DIRECTION/GROUND DIRECTION/BLOCK OC

[GROUND DIRECTION]
M.T.A:
135
M.P.V:
0.20
>BLOCK OC:
NO
Range
NO, YES
Default NO
Step

If BLOCK OC = NO,
If BLOCK OC = YES,
NOTE )
166
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7.13.3. SEF Directional Controls (67SEF)

The SEF direction control process a very similar method to the ground directional controls.
7.13.4. Negative Sequence Directional Controls (67(46))

The negative sequence voltage V2 provides the direction of negative sequence pole in the power
system. The negative sequence direction control is determined as comparing the negative
sequence voltage(V2) to the direction of the negative sequence current(I2). The Maximum Torque
Angle is set between 0 to 359 degree. The factory default value for maximum torque angle
has a lead of 135 degree over V2.
If the polarized voltage drops below minimum polarized voltage, the negative sequence direction
control will lose direction and will not trip. Then any fault on the distribution line may trip due to
the negative sequence overcurrent element which is non-directional.
The negative sequence direction control can be programmed for non-direction or to provide a trip
for current flow in the forward or reverse direction only.
The following diagram shows the phasor diagram for I2 directional polarization in the complex
plane.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
167
To
rq
ue
Li
ne
-V2
To
im
um
ro
Ze
Fault Current
I2
n
Li
ax
ue
rq
e
Re
ve
rs
e
Fo
rw
ar
d
Maximum Torque Angle :

set 135 degree
Voltage:
V2
Figure 7-10. Phasor Diagram for I2 Directional Polarization

The negative sequence directional controls in the following four settings should be enabled.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / NEQ DIRECTION / Type
[NEQ DIRECTION]
>Type:
OFF
M.T.A:
135
M.P.V:
0.20
Range
OFF, FOR, REV
Default OFF
Step

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / NEQ DIRECTION / M.T.A

[NEQ DIRECTION]
Type:
OFF
>M.T.A:
135
M.P.V:
0.20
Range
0 ~ 359 degree
Default 135
Step
1 degree
Enter the maximum torque angle. The maximum torque angle setting
determines the directional operating current for the polarizing voltage.
168
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / NEQ DIRECTION / M.P.V

[NEQ DIRECTION]
Type:
OFF
M.T.A:
135
>M.P.V:
0.20
Range
Default 0.20
Step
0.01
Enter the minimum polarizing voltage.

For systems with high-resistance grounding or floating neutrals, this
M.P.V will be approximately 0.20 x VT.
For system with solidly grounded or resistively grounded the M.P.V
will be approximately 0.10 x VT.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / NEQ DIRECTION / BLOCK OC

[NEQ DIRECTION]
M.T.A:
135
M.P.V:
0.20
>BLOCK OC:
NO
Range
NO, YES
Default NO
Step

If BLOCK OC = NO,
If BLOCK OC = YES,
NOTE )
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
169
7.14. Undervoltage (27)

Two undervoltage elements are provided for trip, alarm and control when the voltage drops
below a specified voltage for a specified time.
The undervoltage element can be ON or OFF in the Primary, Alternate settings. The
undervoltage element can be selected the type of operation required with any one phase, any two
phase and three phase.
The undervoltage element can be used to supervise that torque control other overcurrent
protective elements.
When the circuit breaker is closed by a local/remote controls, the undervoltage element is
disabled from detecting for the cold load pickup during periods. To increase security, all
undervoltage elements add two power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect
operation.
Undervoltage 1 Setup
The undervoltage 1 should be enabled to the following settings.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Function
[UNDER VOLTAGE 1]
>Function:
OFF
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Pickup(xVT):
0.70
Range
OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
Default OFF
Step

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Relays(0-8)

[UNDER VOLTAGE 1]
Function:
OFF
>Relays(0-8):
OFF
Pickup(xVT):
0.70
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
170
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Pickup(xVT)

[UNDER VOLTAGE 1]
Function:
OFF
Relays(0-8):
OFF
>Pickup(xVT):
0.70
Range
Default 0.70
Step
0.01
Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the secondary nominal voltage.

For example, if the secondary nominal voltage is 100V, and an alarm is
required whenever the voltage goes below 70V, enter(70/100) = 0.70
VT for the pickup.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Time Delay

[UNDER VOLTAGE 1]
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Pickup(xVT):
0.70
>Time Delay :
5.00
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Range
Default 5.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set the definite time delay.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Min. V(xVT)

[UNDER VOLTAGE
Pickup(xVT):
Time Delay :
>Min. V(xVT):
1]
0.70
5.00
0.10
Range
Default 0.10
Step
0.01
Enter the minimum voltage for the undervoltage.

Used to prevent the undervoltage 1 element for voltage below this
level. Setting to 0.10 xVT will allow a dead line to be considered a trip
condition.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Pickup Type

[UNDER VOLTAGE 1]
Time Delay :
5.00
Min. V(xVT):
0.10
>Pickup Type:
1P
Range
1P, 2P, 3P
Default 1P
Step
Select the type of phase required for operation.

1P : Function operates when one or more than one phase voltage value
is under the pickup voltage level.
2P : Function operates when two or more than two phase voltage
values are under the pickup voltage level.
3P : Function operates when all three phase voltage values are under
the pickup voltage level.
Undervoltage 2 Setup
The undervoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the undervoltage 1.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
171
7.15. Overvoltage (59)

Two overvoltage elements are provided for trip, alarm and control when the voltage rises above a
specified voltage for a specified time.
The overvoltage element can be ON or OFF in the Primary, Alternate settings . The overvoltage
element can be selected the type of operation required with any one phase, any two phase and
three phase.
When the circuit breaker is closed by a local/remote controls, the overvoltage element is disabled
from detecting for the cold load pickup during periods. To increase security, all overvoltage
elements add two power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect operation.
Overvoltage 1 Setup
The overvoltage 1 should be enabled to the following settings.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLTAGE 1 / Function
[OVER VOLTAGE 1]
>Function:
OFF
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Pickup(xVT):
1.20
Range
OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
Default OFF
Step

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLTAGE 1 / Relays(0-8)

[OVER VOLTAGE 1]
Function:
OFF
>Relays(0-8):
OFF
Pickup(xVT):
1.20
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLTAGE 1 / Pickup(xVT)

[OVER VOLTAGE 1]
Function:
OFF
Relays(0-8):
OFF
>Pickup(xVT):
1.20
Range
0.00 ~ 1.25 xVT
Default 1.20
Step
0.01

For example, if the secondary nominal voltage is 100 V, and an alarm is
required whenever the voltage exceeds 120 V, enter 120 / 100 = 1.20
for the pickup.
172
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLTAGE 1 / Time Delay

[OVER VOLTAGE 1]
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Pickup(xVT):
1.20
>Time Delay :
5.00
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 5.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set the definite time delay.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLTAGE 1 / Pickup Type

[OVER VOLTAGE 1]
Pickup(xVT):
1.20
Time Delay :
5.00
>Pickup Type:
1P
Range
1P, 2P, 3P
Default 1P
Step
Select the type of phase required for operation.

1P : Function operates when one or more than one phase voltage value
is over the pickup voltage level.
2P : Function operates when two or more than two phase voltage
values are over the pickup voltage level.
3P : Function operates when all three phase voltage values are over the
pickup voltage level.
Overvoltage 2 Setup
The overvoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
173
7.16. Frequency(81)
EVRC2A has underfrequency and overfrequency elements to detect unusual frequency in power
system. Explanation for each element is below.
Underfrequency (81U)
Underfrequency element is provided for trip, alarm and control when the frequency drops below
a specified frequency setting for a specified time delay.
The underfrequency element can be ON or OFF in the Primary, Alternate settings.
The power system frequency is measured from the zero crossing on the VA-N voltage input for
Wye connected VTs and VA-B voltage for Delta connected VTs.
The underfrequency minimum voltage and underfrequency minimum current are used to prevent
incorrect operation when the recloser is closed by a local/remote control and the underfrequency
is disabled from tripping for cold load pickup during periods.
Overfrequency (81O)
Overfrequency element is provided for trip, alarm and control when the frequency rises above a
specified frequency setting for a specified time delay.
The overfrequency element can be ON or OFF in the Primary, Alternate settings.
The power system frequency is measured from the zero crossing on the VA-N voltage input for
Wye connected VTs and VA-B voltage for Delta connected VTs.
The overfrequency minimum voltage and overfrequency minimum current are used to prevent
incorrect operation when the recloser is closed by a local/remote control and the overfrequency is
disabled from tripping for cold load pickup during periods.
Frequency Setup
The underfrequency and overfrequency element should be enabled to the following settings.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Function
[FREQUENCY]
>Function:
OFF
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Under Pu(Hz): 55.00
Range
OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
Default OFF
Step

174
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Relays(0-8)

[FREQUENCY]
Function:
OFF
>Relays(0-8):
OFF
Under Pu(Hz): 55.00
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Underfreqency Pickup(Hz)

[[FREQUENCY]
Function:
OFF
Relays(0-8):
OFF
>Under Pu(Hz): 55.00
Range
40.00 ~ 60.00 Hz
Default 45.00
Step
0.01 Hz
Enter the level of which the underfrequency element is to pickup. For

example, if the system frequency is 60, and load shedding is required
at 55.00, enter 55.00 for this setting.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Underfreqency Time Delay

[FREQUENCY]
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Under Pu(Hz): 55.00
>Under TD:
2.00
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 2.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set the definite time delay for underfrequency.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Overfreqency Pickup(Hz)

[[FREQUENCY]
Under Pu(Hz): 55.00
Under TD:
2.00
>Over Pu(Hz): 65.00
Range
50.00 ~ 70.00 Hz
Default 55.00
Step
0.01 Hz
Enter the level of which the overfrequency element is to pickup. For

example, if the system frequency is 60, and load shedding is required
at 65.00, enter 65.00 for this setting.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Overfreqency Time Delay

[FREQUENCY]
Under TD:
2.00
Over Pu(Hz): 65.00
>Over TD:
6.00
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 6.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set the definite time delay for Overfrequency.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
175
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Min. V(xVT)

[FREQUENCY]
>Over TD:
6.00
>Min. V(xVT):
0.10
>Min. I(A):
10
0.00 ~ 1.25
Range
Default 0.10
Step
0.01
Enter the minimum voltage required to allow the frequency element to

Operate.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Min. I(A)

[FREQUENCY]
>Over TD:
6.00
>Min. V(xVT):
0.10
>Min. I(A):
10
Range
10 ~ 1600A
Default 10
Step
1A
Enter the minimum value of current required for any phase to allow the
frequency element to operate.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / NFCL Func

[FREQUENCY]
>Min. I(A):
10
>NFCL Func:
OFF
>NFCL TD:
60.0
Range
OFF, ON
Default OFF
Step
Enable or disable CLOSE function when the frequency becomes

normal.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / NFCL TD

[FREQUENCY]
>Min. I(A):
0.01
>NFCL Func:
OFF
>NFCL TD:
60.0
Range
0.0 ~ 6000.0 sec
Default 60.0
Step
Set the time delay before CLOSE operation.
176
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
0.1
7.17. Other Element

7.17.1. Sequence Coordination
When several Reclosers are connected in series to protect distribution systems, EVRC2A
contains Sequence Coordination feature which can prevent the simultaneous trip operations in
both of Back-up and Down-line Reclosers due to phase/ground fault. Sequence Coordination
feature is activated only if one out of several Down-line Reclosers connected to one Back-up
Recloser detects a fault current.
The following rules should be kept to activate Sequence Coordination feature.
1) The same characteristics of fast and delay operations in the total number of the trip
operations and identical basic Time Current Curves should be set for all Reclosers connected
in series.
2) The identical reclose interval time should be set for all Reclosers in series.
3) To coordinate the protection characteristics, an additional delay operation time (at least 100
ms) should be applied to the Time Current Curve characteristics of Back-up Recloser, not to
those of Down-line Reclosers.
4) The reset time of Back-up Recloser should be set longer than any reclose interval time of all
Down-line Reclosers. This setting will prevent the reset operation of Back-up Recloser
during the reclose operation of Down-lines.
The Sequence Coordination feature should be enabled to the following settings.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OTHER ELEMENT / Seq' Coordi'
[ OTHER ELEMENT ]
>Seq Coordi:
OFF
L.O Priority:
GND
F/I Reset:
AUTO
Range
OFF, ON
Default OFF
Step
Sequence coordination offers the function of preventing unnecessary

operation of the backup recloser when two more reclosers are
connected in series.
If function = ON, the feature is operational.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
177
As shown in Figure 7-11. Sequence Coordination Operation Block Diagram, if Sequence

Coordination feature at Back-up Recloser is enabled and a phase/ground fault occurs in
distribution systems, the Back-up Recloser operates timing counter by overcurrent elements.
During the count at the Back-up Recloser, if the distribution system is restored to normal by
TRIP with Down-line Recloser, the number of the trip operations of Back-up Recloser is
increased one step.
Back-up Recloser performs trip operation instead of activating Sequence Coordination feature at
the last sequence of the full sequence. If Auto Reclose switch is set to one TRIP, Sequence
Coordination function cannot be operated.
Increase Trip Counter without Trip
Starting
Reset Time
Counter
Close
Back Up
EVR 1
Down line
EVR 2
Open
Close
Lockout Status
Open
Time
Faulted
Figure 7-11. Sequence Coordination Operation Block Diagram
7.17.2. Other Element

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OTHER ELEMENT / L.O Priority
[OTHER ELEMENT]
Seq Coordi:
OFF
>L.O Priority:
GND
F/I Reset:
AUTO
Range
PHA, GND
Default GND
Step
Lockout priority
PHA : Phase prior
GND : Ground prior
178
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OTHER ELEMENT / F/I Reset

[OTHER ELEMENT]
Seq Coordi:
OFF
L.O Priority:
GND
>F/I Reset:
AUTO
Range
AUTO, MANUAL
Default AUTO
Step
Faulted Indicator reset method

AUTO : Reset shall be performed by pressing [FI RESET] button or
shall be performed automatically after High Voltage line becomes
normal.
MANUAL : It shall be reset by pressing [FI RESET] button.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OTHER ELEMENT / D/T M-Close

[OTHER ELEMENT]
L.O Priority:
GND
F/I Reset:
AUTO
>D/T M-Close:
0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
Time delay for manual close
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
179
7.18. Time Overcurrent Curves

The EVRC2A is equipped Standard ANSI/IEEE curves, IEC curves, ESB curves, user-defined
curves and all 37 non standard recloser curves are available.
A Configuration setting determines whether elements set to use ANSI/IEEE curves, IEC curves,
ESB curves, user-defined curves reset instantaneously, or corresponding with electromechanical.
The operation times and reset times refer to ANSI/IEEE C37.112 and IEC 255-3.
The operation times and reset times are defined as follows :
ANSI/IEEE
Trip Time(Sec) = TD ( ( / (M-1) + ) + TA)
IEC
Trip Time(Sec) = TD ( ( / (M-1)) + TA)
ESB
USER-DEFINED
Reset Time(Sec) = TD (Rt / (1-M2))
Table 7-2. Curve Factor
TD
Time dial
TA
Time adder
, ,
Characteristic constant
Multiples of pickup current
Rt
Reset characteristic constant

NOTE )
1) Time Dial and Time Adder settings of each Time Overcurrent(Fast/Delay) menu are
applied to Time dial(TD) and Time adder(TA) respectively.
2) Recloser clearing time curves are used when rated voltage of recloser is 15 or 27,
otherwise which added 30(4) are used when it is 38.
180
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Related Setting Menu

1) USER CURVE 1
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / USER CURVE SET / USER CURVE 1 / Factor a
[USER CURVE 1]
>Factor a:
59.5000
Factor b:
2.0000
Factor r:
1.8000
Range
0.0000 ~ 150.9999
Default 59.5000
Step
0.0001
User defined curve factor
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / USER CURVE SET / USER CURVE 1 / Factor b

[USER CURVE 1]
Factor a:
59.5000
>Factor b:
2.0000
Factor r:
1.8000
Range
0.0000 ~ 150.9999
Default 2.0000
Step
0.0001
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / USER CURVE SET / USER CURVE 1 / Factor r

[USER CURVE 1]
Factor a:
59.5000
Factor b:
2.0000
>Factor r:
1.8000
Range
0.0000 ~ 150.9999
Default 1.8000
Step
0.0001
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / USER CURVE SET / USER CURVE 1 / Factor rt

[USER CURVE 1]
Factor b:
2.0000
Factor r:
1.8000
>Factor rt: 59.5000
Range
0.0000 ~ 150.9999
Default 59.5000
Step
0.0001
User defined curve factor rt
2) USER CURVE 2, 3, 4 :
USER CURVE 2 ~ 4, the same as USER CURVE 1 above
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
181
Standard Curve Coefficients

Table 7-3. ANSI/IEEE
Curves
Rt
Moderately Inverse
0.0107
0.020
0.0231
1.0700
Normally Inverse
5.9500
2.000
0.18
5.9500
Very Inverse
3.985
2.000
0.095
3.985
Extremely Inverse
5.9100
2.000
0.0345
5.9100
Short Time Inverse
3.56e-3
0.02
1.95e-2
0.356
Short Time Very Inverse
1.9925
2.000
0.0475
1.992
Curves
Rt
Standard Inverse
0.1400
0.0200
0.0
9.700
Very Inverse
13.500
1.000
0.0
13.500
Extremely Inverse
80.000
2.000
0.0
80.000
Long Time Inverse
135.000
1.000
0.0
135.00
Short Time Inverse
0.0500
0.0400
0.0
0.500
Curves
Rt
Standard Inverse
0.011
0.02
0.042
9.000
Very Inverse
3.985
1.95
0.1084
3.985
Long Time Very Inverse
15.94
1.95
0.4336
15.94
Curves
Rt
User1
59.5000
2.0000
1.8000
59.5000
User2
39.8500
2.0000
0.9500
39.8500
User3
59.1000
2.0000
0.3450
59.1000
User4
5.6700
2.0000
0.0352
5.6700
Table 7-4. IEC
Table 7-5. ESB
Table 7-6. User Defined
182
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Table 7-7. Definite Time

Curves
Rt
Definite Time 1sec
0.0
1.0
1.0
Definite Time 10sec
0.0
10.0
10.0
Table 7-8. Non Standard Curves

McGraw-Edison recloser curves
Phase
Ground
Old
New
Old
New
101
102
117
135
133
140
116
106
132
114
163
136
122
152
164
113
KP
162
8*
111
107
131
118
11
141
104
13
142
115
14
119
105
15
112
161
16
139
137
17
103
138
18
151
120
KG
165
134
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
183
100
90
80
70
60
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
1) ANSI/IEEE Moderately Inverse Curves
100
90
80
70
60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE

: ANSI MODERATELY INVERSE
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
15.00
13.00
11.00
TIME(SECONDS)
9.00
7.00
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
5.00
4.00
3.00
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
2.00
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
1.00
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 7-12. ANSI/IEEE Moderately Inverse Curves
184
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
0.01
800
900
1k
0.01
700
0.02
600
0.02
500
0.03
400
0.03
300
0.04
200
0.05
0.04
100
0.05
100
90
80
70
60
7k
6k
5k
4k
8k
9k
10k
100
90
80
70
60

: ANSI NORMALLY INVERSE
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
15.00
13.00
11.00
9.00
7.00
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
5.00
4.00
3.00
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.4
2.00
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
1.00
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.50
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
0.01
2k
0.01
800
900
1k
0.02
700
0.02
600
0.03
500
0.03
400
0.04
300
0.05
0.04
200
0.05
100
TIME(SECONDS)
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
2) ANSI/IEEE Normally Inverse Curves
Figure 7-13. ANSI/IEEE Normally Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
185
100
90
80
70
60
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
3) ANSI/IEEE Very Inverse Curves
100
90
80
70
60

: ANSI VERY INVERSE
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
15.00
13.00
11.00
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
9.00
7.00
0.5
5.00
0.5
0.4
4.00
0.4
0.3
3.00
0.3
0.2
2.00
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
1.00
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.50
0.05
Figure 7-14. ANSI/IEEE Very Inverse Curves
186
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
0.01
800
900
1k
0.01
700
0.02
600
0.02
500
0.03
400
0.03
300
0.04
200
0.04
100
TIME(SECONDS)
100
90
80
70
60
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
8k
9k
10k
100
90
80
70
60

: ANSI EXTREMELY INVERSE
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
15.00
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
13.00
0.5
11.00
0.4
0.4
9.00
0.3
0.3
7.00
0.2
0.2
5.00
4.00
3.00
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
2.00
0.05
0.05
1.00
0.04
0.04
0.03
0.03
0.02
0.02
0.50
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
0.01
200
0.01
100
TIME(SECONDS)
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
4) ANSI/IEEE Extremely Inverse Curves
Figure 7-15. ANSI/IEEE Extremely Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
187
100
90
80
70
60
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
8k
9k
10k
100
90
80
70
60

: ANSI SHORT TIME INVERSE
50
40
TIME(SECONDS)
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
5) ANSI/IEEE Short Time Inverse Curves
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
15.00
13.00
9.00
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
7.00
0.5
11.00
0.4
0.4
5.00
0.3
0.3
4.00
3.00
0.2
0.2
2.00
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
1.00
0.05
0.05
0.04
0.04
0.50
Figure 7-16. ANSI/IEEE Short Time Inverse Curves
188
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
0.01
500
0.01
400
0.02
300
0.02
200
0.03
100
0.03
100
90
80
70
60
8k
9k
10k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
7k
100
90
80
70
60

: ANSI SHOTR TIME VERY INVERSE
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
15.00
13.00
11.00
0.5
0.5
9.00
0.4
0.4
7.00
0.3
0.3
5.00
0.2
0.2
4.00
3.00
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
2.00
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
1.00
0.05
0.04
0.04
0.03
0.03
0.50
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
0.01
400
0.01
300
0.02
200
0.02
100
TIME(SECONDS)
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
6) ANSI/IEEE Short Time Very Inverse Curves
Figure 7-17. ANSI/IEEE Short Time Very Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
189
100
90
80
70
60
7k
6k
5k
8k
9k
10k
100
90
80
70
60

: IEC STANDARD INVERSE
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
TIME(SECONDS)
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
7) IEC Standard Inverse Curves
1
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.4
0.3
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.1
0.2
0.05
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
Figure 7-18. IEC Standard Inverse Curves
190
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
0.01
800
900
1k
0.01
700
0.02
600
0.02
500
0.03
400
0.03
300
0.04
200
0.05
0.04
100
0.05
100
90
80
70
60
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
900
1k
8k
9k
10k
100
90
80
70
60

: IEC VERY INVERSE
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.5
1.00
0.4
0.4
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.4
0.3
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.2
0.06
0.06
0.05
0.05
0.1
0.04
0.04
0.03
0.03
0.05
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
0.01
400
0.01
300
0.02
200
0.02
100
TIME(SECONDS)
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
8) IEC Very Inverse Curves
Figure 7-19. IEC Very Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
191
100
90
80
70
60
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
8k
9k
10k
100
90
80
70
60

: IEC EXTREMELY INVERSE
50
40
TIME(SECONDS)
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
9) IEC Extremely Inverse Curves
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
1.00
0.05
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.04
0.5
0.05
0.04
0.4
0.03
0.03
0.3
0.02
0.02
0.2
0.1
0.05
Figure 7-20. IEC Extremely Inverse Curves
192
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
0.01
100
0.01
100
90
80
70
60
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
10) IEC Long Time Inverse Curves
100
90
80
70
60

: IEC LONG TIME VERY INVERSE
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
1.00
0.8
0. 7
0. 6
0. 5
2
0. 4
0. 3
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.2
0.5
0.5
0.1
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.05
8k
9k
10k
7k
0.01
6k
0.01
5k
0.02
4k
0.02
3k
0.03
2k
0.03
800
900
1k
0.04
700
0.05
0.04
600
0.05
500
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
400
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
300
0.2
200
0.2
100
TIME(SECONDS)
Figure 7-21. IEC Long Time Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
193
100
90
80
70
60
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
8k
9k
10k
100
90
80
70
60

: IEC SHORT TIME INVERSE
50
40
TIME(SECONDS)
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
11) IEC Short Time Inverse Curves
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
1.00
0.3
0.3
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.2
0.2
0.5
0.4
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.3
0.2
0.05
0.05
0.04
0.04
0.1
0.03
0.03
0.02
0.02
0.05
Figure 7-22. IEC Short Time Inverse Curves
194
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
0.01
100
0.01
100
90
80
70
8k
9k
10k
6k
5k
4k
7k
100
90
80
70

: ESB INVERSE
60
50
40
60
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
15.00
13.00
11.00
9.00
7.00
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
5.00
4.00
3.00
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
2.00
0.3
0.3
0.2
1.00
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.50
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
0.01
2k
0.01
800
900
1k
0.02
700
0.02
600
0.03
500
0.03
400
0.04
300
0.05
0.04
200
0.05
100
TIME(SECONDS)
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
12) ESB Inverse Curves
Figure 7-23. ESB Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
195
100
90
80
70
60
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
13) ESB Very Inverse Curves
100
90
80
70
60

: ESB VERY INVERSE
VARIATIONS 5% 0.01 SECONDS
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
TIME(SECONDS)
15.00
13.00
11.00
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
9.00
7.00
5.00
0.5
0.5
4.00
0.4
0.4
3.00
0.3
0.3
2.00
0.2
0.2
1.00
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.05
Figure 7-24. ESB Very Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
0.01
600
0.01
500
0.02
400
0.02
300
0.03
200
0.03
100
0.04
196
0.05
0.04
100
90
80
70
60
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
14) ESB Long Time Very Inverse Curves
100
90
80
70
60

: ESB LONG TIME VERY INVERSE
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
15.00
13.00
11.00
9.00
7.00
5.00
2
4.00
3.00
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
2.00
0.5
0.5
1.00
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.50
8k
9k
10k
7k
0.01
6k
0.01
5k
0.02
4k
0.02
3k
0.03
2k
0.03
800
900
1k
0.04
700
0.05
0.04
600
0.05
500
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
400
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
300
0.2
200
0.2
100
TIME(SECONDS)
Figure 7-25. ESB Long Time Very Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
197
100
90
80
70
60
40
7k
6k
5k
4k
8k
9k
10k
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
D2
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
D1
0.01
0.01
Figure 7-26. Definite Time Curves (D1, D2)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8k
9k
10k
0.02
7k
0.02
6k
0.03
5k
0.03
4k
0.04
3k
0.05
0.04
2k
0.05
800
900
1k
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
700
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
600
0.2
500
0.2
400
0.3
300
0.4
0.3
200
0.5
0.4
100
0.5
198
100
90
80
70
60

: D1, D2
50
TIME(SECONDS)
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
15) Definite Time Curves (D1, D2)
100
90
80
70
60
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
8k
9k
10k
100
90
80
70
60

: A, B, C, D, E
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
B
E
0.05
0.05
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
0.01
800
900
1k
0.01
700
0.02
600
0.02
500
0.03
400
0.03
300
0.04
200
0.04
100
TIME(SECONDS)
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
16) Non Standard Curves (A, B, C, D, E)
Figure 7-27. Non Standard Curves (A, B, C, D, E)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
199
100
90
80
70
60
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
8k
100
90
80
70
60

: KP, L, M, N
50
40
TIME(SECONDS)
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
17) Non Standard Curves (KP, L, M, N)
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
KP
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
L
M
N
Figure 7-28. Non Standard Curves (KP, L, M, N)
200
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
0.01
800
900
1k
0.01
700
0.02
600
0.02
500
0.03
400
0.03
300
0.04
200
0.05
0.04
100
0.05
100
90
80
70
60
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
8k
9k
10k
100
90
80
70
60

: P, R, T, V
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
R
P
0.05
0.05
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
0.01
800
900
1k
0.01
700
0.02
600
0.02
500
0.03
400
0.03
300
0.04
200
0.04
100
TIME(SECONDS)
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
18) Non Standard Curves (P, R, T, V)
Figure 7-29. Non Standard Curves (P, R, T, V)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
201
100
90
80
70
60
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
8k
9k
10k
100
90
80
70
60

: W, Y, Z
50
40
TIME(SECONDS)
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
19) Non Standard Curves (W, Y, Z)
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.5
Z
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
W
0.2
0.2
Figure 7-30. Non Standard Curves (W, Y, Z)
202
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
0.01
3k
0.01
2k
0.02
800
900
1k
0.02
700
0.03
600
0.03
500
0.04
400
0.05
0.04
300
0.05
200
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
100
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
100
90
80
70
60
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
8k
9k
10k
100
90
80
70
60

: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
5
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
4
1
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
0.01
2k
0.01
800
900
1k
0.02
700
0.02
600
0.03
500
0.03
400
0.04
300
0.05
0.04
200
0.05
100
TIME(SECONDS)
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
20) Non Standard Curves (1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
Figure 7-31. Non Standard Curves (1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
203
100
90
80
70
60
7k
6k
5k
4k
8k
9k
10k
100
90
80
70
60

: 6, 7, 8, 8*, 9
50
40
30
50
40
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
TIME(SECONDS)
3k
2k
900
1k
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
21) Non Standard Curves (6, 7, 8, 8*, 9)
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
8*
0.05
0.05
Figure 7-32. Non Standard Curves (6, 7, 8, 8*, 9)
204
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
0.01
700
0.01
600
0.02
500
0.02
400
0.03
300
0.03
200
0.04
100
0.04
RECLOS
SER CONTR
ROL EVRC2A
A-N6,NT
http
p://www.enttecene.co.krr
22) Non
N Standardd Curves (11,, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)
Figure 7-333. Non Standdard Curvess (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 118)
ENHA
ANCED TEC
CHNOLOGY
Y
205
100
90
80
70
60
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
8k
9k
10k
100
90
80
70
60

: F, H, J, KG
50
40
TIME(SECONDS)
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
23) Non Standard Curves (F, H, J, KG)
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
J
KG
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.05
0.04
0.04
Figure 7-34. Non Standard Curves (F, H, J, KG)
206
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
0.01
500
0.01
400
0.02
300
0.02
200
0.03
100
0.03
7.19. Loss of Phase - Option

EVRC2A has a loss of phase element. The element is provided for trip, alarm and control when
loss of phase is occurred. Loss of Phase can be turned on and off by Primary and Alternate
settings and is an optional element depending on the specification of EVRC2A.
If any phase voltage of source side becomes 110% higher than Loss of Phase level and one or
two phases voltage keeps lower than Loss of Phase for a certain period, circuit breaker
determines Loss of Phase.
The loss of phase element in the following four settings should be enabled for loss of phase.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / LOSS OF PHASE / Function
[LOSS OF PHASE]
>Function:
OFF
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Pickup(xVT):
0.30
Range
OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
Default OFF
Step

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / LOSS OF PHASE / Relays(0-8)

[LOSS OF PHASE]
Function:
OFF
>Relays(0-8):
OFF
Pickup(xVT):
0.30
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / LOSS OF PHASE / Pickup(xVT)
[LOSS OF PHASE]
Function:
OFF
Relays(0-8):
OFF
>Pickup(xVT):
0.30
Range
0.00 ~ 1.25
Default 0.30
Step
0.01

For example, if the secondary nominal voltage is 100V, and an alarm is
required whenever the voltage goes below 70V, enter(30/100) = 0.30
VT for the pickup.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / LOSS OF PHASE / Time Delay

[LOSS OF PHASE]
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Pickup(xVT):
0.30
>Time Delay:
20.00
Range
0.10 ~ 100.00 sec
Default 20.00
Step
0.01 sec
The time set-up is to delay time for loss of phase trip.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
207
8. MONITORING
EVRC2A has Monitoring function for following items and also has functions for user to output
Alarm signal or Trip signal.
y
DEMAND
SYNCHRO CHECK
TRIP COUNTER
RECLOSER WEAR
BATTERY TEST
FAULT LOCATOR
GAS LOW LOCK Option
EXT TRIP & LOCK Option
LIVE LOAD BLOCK Option
8.1. Demand
8.1.1. Description
EVRC2A is programmed to monitor following items to be operated as user sets.
y
Phase Current demand value
Ground current demand value
Negative sequence current demand value
8.1.2. Related Setting Menu

1) Function Setting
Select for system to operate when Demand elements were picked up.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / Function
[DEMAND]
>Function:
Relays(0-8):
Type:
Range
OFF
OFF
THM
OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
Default OFF
Step
OFF : OFF Monitoring

TRIP : Generates Trip signal
TR&AR : Generate Trip and Alarm signal
208
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
2) Alarm Output Relay Setting

Select Relay output for alarm.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / Relays(0-8)
[DEMAND]
Function:
>Relays(0-8):
Type:
Range
OFF
OFF
THM
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step

0000 : No Output Relay is selected.
3) Demand Method Setting

Setting for Demand calculation method.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / Type
[DEMAND]
Function:
Relays(0-8):
>Type:
Range
OFF
OFF
THM
THM, ROL
Default THM
Step
THM : Calculated by Thermal Exponential demand.

ROL : Calculated Rolling demand.
4) Time constant Setting

Setting for 90% Response time in Thermal calculation method.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / Time Constant(m)
[DEMAND]
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Type:
THM
>Time Constant(m): 5
Range
5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min
Default 5
Step
Enter the time required for a steady state current to indicate 90% of the
actual value.
5) Phase demand pickup current setting

Setting for Phase demand pickup current.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / PHA PU(A)
[DEMAND]
Type:
THM
Time Constant(m): 5
>PHA PU(A):
600
Range
OFF, 10 ~ 1600A
Default 600A
Step
1A
Set Phase demand pickup current.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
209
6) Ground demand pickup current Setting

Setting for Ground demand pickup current.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / GND PU(A)
[DEMAND]
Time Constant(m): 5
PHA PU(A):
600
>GND PU(A):
300
Range
OFF, 10 ~ 1600A
Default 300A
Step
1A
Set Ground demand pickup current.
7) Negative sequence demand pickup current Setting

Setting for Negative sequence demand pickup current.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / NEQ PU(A)
[DEMAND]
PHA PU(A):
GND PU(A):
>NEQ PU(A):
Range
600
300
600
OFF, 10 ~ 1600A
Default 600A
Step
Set Negative sequence demand pickup current.
210
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
1A
8.2. Synchronism Check (25)

EVRC2A provides the manual close for the synchronism check element that synchronism
voltages are within the programmed differentials of voltage magnitude, phase angle position, and
frequency.
If this feature is enabled, the synchronism check will be performed before local/remote close
with the exception of automatic reclose for fault.
When either or both of the synchronism check voltages are de-energized, the synchronism check
can allow for local/remote close.
If EVRC2A is the type of VD, the synchronism check voltage input VL is connected to load
side(VR phase) in recloser. The other synchronizing phase can be connected for phase-neutral
voltage Vr, Vs or Vt; for phase-phase voltages Vab or Vcb. on load side in recloser.
The synchronism check element in the following settings should be enabled.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / Function
[SYNCHROCHECK]
>Function:
OFF
Relays(0-8):
OFF
D.V.Max(xVT): 0.50
Range
OFF, ALARM
Default OFF
Step

If function = ALARM, the feature is operational.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / Relays(0-8)

[SYNCHROCHECK]
Function:
OFF
>Relays(0-8):
OFF
D.V.Max(xVT): 0.50
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates an

Alarm.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / D.V.Max(xVT)

[SYNCHROCHECK]
Function:
OFF
Relays(0-8):
OFF
>D.V.Max(xVT): 0.50
Range
0.00 ~ 1.25
Default 0.50
Step
0.01
Enter the dead line maximum voltage for synchronism check.

Used to Prevent the synchronism check element for voltage below this
level.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
211
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / L.V.Min(xVT)

[SYNCHROCHECK]
Relays(0-8):
OFF
D.V.Max(xVT): 0.50
>L.V.Min(xVT): 0.85
Range
0.00 ~ 1.25
Default 0.85
Step
0.01
Enter the live line minimum voltage for synchronism check.

Used to activate the synchronism check element for voltage over this
level.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / M.V.D(V)

[SYNCHROCHECK]
D.V.Max(xVT): 0.50
L.V.Min(xVT): 0.85
>M.V.D(V):
0.10
Range
0.00 ~ 1.25
Default 0.10
Step
0.01
Enter the maximum voltage difference of the synchronism voltages.

A voltage magnitude differential of the two input voltages below this
value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / M.A.D(Deg)

[SYNCHROCHECK]
L.V.Min(xVT): 0.85
M.V.D(V):
0.10
>M.A.D(Deg):
15
Range
0 ~ 100 deg
Default 15
Step
1 deg
Enter the maximum angle difference of the synchronism voltages.

An angular differential between the synchronism voltage angles below
this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / M.F.D(Hz)

[SYNCHROCHECK]
M.V.D(V):
0.10
M.A.D(Deg):
15
>M.F.D(Hz):
2.00
Range
0.00 ~ 5.00 Hz
Default 2.00
Step
0.01 Hz
Enter the maximum frequency difference of the synchronism voltages.

A frequency differential between the synchronism voltages below this
value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / Sync Phase

[SYNCHROCHECK]
M.A.D(Deg):
15
M.F.D(Hz):
2.00
>Sync Phase:
R(AB)
Range
R(AB), S(CB), T(AC)
Default R(AB)
Step
Select the synchronism check phase on load side.
212
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8.3. Trip Counter

8.3.1. Trip Counter Explanation
EVRC2A records counter related with System operation. Especially Trip Counter is operated
depending on Monitoring function set by user.
y
Trip : Records trip operation count
Fault : Records Fault count
System Restart : Records system restart count

MAIN MENU / MAINTENANCE / COUNTERS
[ COUNTER ]
1.TRIP
:
00000
2.FAULT :
00000
3.RESTART:
00011
User can confirm in MAIN MENU/MAINTENANCE/COUNTERS

1) Function Setting
Select for system to operate when Trip Counter reaches Limit value set by user.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / TRIP COUNTER / Function
[TRIP COUNTER]
>Function:
OFF
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Limit:
10000
Range
OFF, ALARM
Default OFF
Step
OFF : OFF Monitoring

ALARM : Generate Alarm signal
2) Alarm Output Relay Setting

Select Relay output for alarm.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / TRIP COUNTER / Relays(0-8)
[TRIP COUNTER]
Function:
OFF
>Relays(0-8):
OFF
Limit:
10000
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step

0000(off) : No Output Relay is selected.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
213
3) Limit value Setting

Setting for Trip Counter Monitor value.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / TRIP COUNTER / Limit
[TRIP COUNTER]
Function:
OFF
Relays(0-8):
OFF
>Limit:
10000
Range
1 ~ 20000
Default 10000
Step
Select for system to operate when Trip Counter limit value was picked
up.
4) Clear value Setting

Use to synchronize EVRC2A counter with Recloser Counter.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / TRIP COUNTER / Counter set
[TRIP COUNTER]
Relays(0-8):
OFF
Limit:
10000
>Counter set:
0
Range
0 ~ 10000
Default 0
Step
Enters a value for Trip Counter Clear.
5) Stored Value Clear

Select 7.Counter in PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA
to clear the Trip Counter.
214
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8.4. Recloser Wear

8.4.1. Recloser Wear Explanation
Maintenance of contact life of Recloser. Manages the contact life calculated from fault current
size when faults interrupted. The initial value is 100%
MAIN MENU / MAINTENANCE / WEAR MONITOR
[WEAR MONITOR (%)]
1.CONTACT A : 98.70
2.CONTACT B : 98.70
3.CONTACT C : 98.70
User can confirm in

MAIN MENU / MAINTENANCE / WEAR MONITOR
Phase A Wear : Shows phase A contact life.
Phase B Wear : Shows phase B contact life.
Phase C Wear : Shows phase C contact life.
8.4.2. Related setting menu

1) Function Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / Function
[RECLOSER WEAR]
>Function:
ALARM
Pickup(%):
20.0
Rated Volt(kV): 15
Range
OFF, ALARM
Default ALARM
Step
Select for system to operate when Recloser wear elements were picked
up.
2) Pickup Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / Pickup(%)
[RECLOSER WEAR]
Function:
ALARM
>Pickup(%):
20.0
Rated Volt(kV): 15
Range
0.0 ~ 50.0 %
Default 20.0
Step
0.1 %
Enter Pickup value of contact life.
3) Rated Voltage Setting

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / Rated Volt(kV)
[RECLOSER WEAR]
Function:
ALARM
Pickup(%):
20.0
>Rated Volt(kV): 15
Range
15, 27, 38
Default Note
Step
Select rated voltage.

NOTE : The rated voltage determines the Recloser type.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
215
4) Interrupter capacity setting

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / Interrupt(kA)
[RECLOSER WEAR]
Pickup(%):
20.0
Rated Volt(kV): 15
>Interrupt(kA): 12.5
Range
5.0 ~ 50.0 kA
Default 16
Step
0.1 kA
Enter the capacity of rated Interrupter.
5) Maximum Rated Interruption Number Setting

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / No. Max I
[RECLOSER WEAR]
Rated Volt(kV): 15
Interrupt(kA): 12.5
>No. Max I:
100
Range
1 ~ 999
Default 100
Step
Enter the capacity of rated Interrupter.
6) Clear value Setting

Use to synchronize EVRC2A contact wear with Recloser contact wear.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / A Wear Set
[RECLOSER WEAR]
>A Wear Set:
100.0
>B Wear Set:
100.0
>C Wear Set:
100.0
Range
0.00 ~ 100.00 %
Default 100.00
Step
0.01 %
Enter a value of Phase A s contact wear.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / B Wear Set

[RECLOSER WEAR]
>A Wear Set:
100.0
>B Wear Set:
100.0
>C Wear Set:
100.0
Range
0.00 ~ 100.00 %
Default 100.00
Step
0.01 %
Enter a value of Phase B s contact wear.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / C Wear Set

[RECLOSER WEAR]
>A Wear Set:
100.0
>B Wear Set:
100.0
>C Wear Set:
100.0
Range
0.00 ~ 100.00 %
Default 100.00
Step
Enter a value of Phase C s contact wear.
216
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
0.01 %
7) Stored value Clear

Select 8. WEAR MONITOR in PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR
SAVED DATA to clear value. Insert the value set in PRIMARY SETTING /
MONITORING / RECLOSER WEAR / A, B, C Wear from LCD menu.
8.5. Battery Test

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / BATTERY TEST / BT Time(day)
[BATTERY TEST]
>BT Time(day):
OFF
Range
0(OFF), 1 ~ 7 day
Default OFF
Step
1 day
Select the period for automatically checking the battery status.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
217
8.6. Fault Locator

The fault locator calculates the distance to the fault. When fault occurs the magnitude and the
phase of voltage and current are varied, and then fault type(phase to ground, (phase to phase to
ground), phase to phase, three phase) can be determined by the analysis of these variations, and
fault distance can be calculated by the estimation of the apparent impedance.
This calculation is based on the assumptions that the feeder positive and zero sequence
impedance are a constant per unit distance and fault impedance is composed of pure resistance.
In calculating, errors could be introduced by several reasons(fault resistance etc.), the major error
due to fault resistance can be reduced by comparing the prefault current and voltage to the fault
current and voltage.
For more accurate calculation, the prefault data is required at least 2 cycles, and the after fault
data is required at least 2 cycles.
If the line impedance per unit and total length were known, the fault distance can be easily
achieved, but source impedance is not required.
Fault data may not be accurate for a close-into-fault condition where there is no prefault power
flow.
In case of closing, during a reclose sequence, the apparent distance of the first fault is very useful.
The algorithm for the fault locator is most applicable to a radial three-phase feeder.
Faulted distribution system is considered as following simplified Figure 8-1. Faulted
distribution system circuit for example.
(1-m)Z
mZ
IA
IF
VA
RF
L
O
A
D
Figure 8-1. Faulted distribution system circuit

The calculated Fault Location can be checked on the FAULT CYCLE event menu. For more
details, refer to 12.1. Waveform Capture.
218
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
The fault locator settings are as follows :

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Function
[FAULT LOCATOR]
>Function :
OFF
Length(km) :
50.0
Z1(RES) :
10.0
Range
OFF, ON
Default OFF
Step

If function = ON, the feature is operational.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Feeder Length

[FAULT LOCATOR]
Function :
OFF
>Length(km) :
50.0
Z1(RES) :
10.0
Range
0.1 ~ 99.9 km
Default 50.0
Step
0.1 km
Enter the total length of the feeder in kilometers
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Z1-Resistive

[FAULT LOCATOR]
Function :
OFF
Length(km) :
50.0
>Z1(RES) :
10.0
Range
0.1 ~ 6000.0
Default 10.0
Step
0.1
Enter the total real components of the feeder positive sequence

impedance, in actual ohms.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Z1-Inductive

[FAULT LOCATOR]
Length(km) :
50
Z1(RES) :
10.0
>Z1(IND) :
10.0
Range
0.1 ~ 6000.0
Default 10.0
Step
0.1
Enter the total imaginary components of the feeder positive sequence

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Z0-Resistive

[FAULT
Z1(RES)
Z1(IND)
>Z0(RES)
LOCATOR]
:
10.0
:
10.0
:
10.0
Range
0.1 ~ 6000.0
Default 10.0
Step
0.1
Enter the total real components of the feeder zero sequence impedance,
in actual ohms.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Z0-Inductive

[FAULT
Z1(IND)
Z0(RES)
>Z0(IND)
LOCATOR]
:
10.0
:
10.0
:
10.0
Range
0.1 ~ 6000.0
Default 10.0
Step
0.1
Enter the total imaginary components of the feeder zero sequence

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
219
8.7. Gas Low Lock - Option

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / GAS LOW LOCK / Function
[GAS LOW LOCK]
>Function:
DISABLE
Range
DISABLE,ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
If function = ENABLE, EVRC2A cant be opened or closed on the

gas pressure low status (below 0.1bar).
If function = DISABLE, EVRC2A can be opened or closed even if it
is on the gas pressure low status.
NOTE : This function is applies only to Gas Type Recloser.
8.8. EXT Trip & Lock - Option

This function can make EVRC2A opened and then close lock when the corresponding signal sent
from SCADA is received. And EVRC2A can be reset from close lock status by FI Reset
command.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / EXT Trip & Lock / Function
[EXT Trip & Lock]
>Function:
DISABLE
>USE Inputport:
1
>Reset Method: LOCAL
Range
DISABLE,ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
If function = ENABLE, EVRC2A will be open and then close locked

when the signal from SCADA is received.
If function = DISABLE, the function is not activated even if the signal
is received.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / EXT Trip & Lock / USE Inputport

[EXT Trip & Lock]
>Function:
DISABLE
>USE Inputport:
1
Range
1~8
Default 1
Step
Set the port to receive the signal from SCADA.

As example, if 1 is set, this function is activated or not by the signal
value on IN01 port.
220
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / EXT Trip & Lock \ Reset Method

[EXT Trip & Lock]
>Function:
DISABLE
>USE Inputport:
1
0:LOCAL,1:LO&RE
Range
Default LOCAL
Step
LOCAL : By pushing [FI Reset] Key on the panel, the close lock is
released.
LO&RE : By pushing [FI Reset] Key on the panel or remote FI
Reset command, the close lock is released.
8.9. Live Load Block Option

When closed, EVRC2A provides the Close Block function operated by whether or not there is
voltage live line on the load side.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / Live Load Blocking / Function
[Live Load Blocking]
>Function:
OFF
>Pickup(xVT):
0.30
>Time Delay:
1.00
Range
OFF, RECLO, CLOSE, BOTH
Default OFF
Step
If function = OFF, the function is not operational.

If function = RECLOSE, the function is operated when reclosed after
fault occurrence.
If function = CLOSE, the function is operated when manually closed
locally or remotely.
If function = BOTH, the function is operated when reclosed or
manually closed.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / Live Load Blocking / Pickup(xVT)

>Function:
OFF
>Pickup(xVT):
0.30
>Time Delay:
1.00
Range
0.10 ~ 0.90
Default 0.30
Step
0.01
Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the secondary nominal voltage in

load side. As example, if secondary voltage of load side is 100V and a
user wants that the close lock is operated when the voltage of load side
is over 30V, set 0.3090.30x100V = 30V)
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / Live Load Blocking / Time Delay

>Function:
OFF
>Pickup(xVT):
0.30
>Time Delay:
1.00
Range
0.00~600.00sec
Default 1.00sec
Step
0.01
At open, if the voltage on load side is over the Pickup setting and
maintained for this setting time, the close block is operated.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
221
9. STATUS
This menu shows the current status of EVRC2A like below
y
OPTO INPUTS
RELAY OUTPUTS
CLOCK
CONTROL TYPE
9.1. OPTO Inputs

Move to MAIN MENU / STATUS / OPTO INPUTS to see external input port status..
[OPTO INPUTS]
Input 1:
OPEN
Input 2:
CLOSE
Input 3:
OPEN
Input 4:
OPEN
Input 5:
OPEN
Input 6:
OPEN
Input 7:
OPEN
Input 8:
CLOSE
Door St:
CLOSE
Display 8 input port statuses. They are indicated as OPEN or

CLOSE depending on the input signal status.
OPEN : Shows External Input is de-asserted,
CLOSE : Shows External Input is asserted.
Use [] [] button to see all input port statuses
9.2. Relay Outputs

Move to MAIN MENU / STATUS / RELAY OUTPUTS to see external output port status.
[RELAY OUTPUTS]
Output 1:
OPEN
Output 2:
CLOSE
Output 3:
OPEN
Output 4:
OPEN
Output 5:
OPEN
Output 6:
OPEN
Output 7:
OPEN
Output 8:
CLOSE
Display 8 output port statuses. They are indicated as OPEN or

CLOSE depending on the output signal status.
OPEN : Shows External Output is de-asserted,
CLOSE : Shows External Output is asserted.
Use [] [] button to see all output port statuses
222
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
9.3. Clock
Move to MAIN MENU / STATUS / CLOCK to see current time.
The CLOCK menu screen can vary according to the EVRC2A version.
Prior to Ver 6.15 of EVRC2A
STATUS / CLOCK
Check current time
[CURRENT TIME]
2009/11/05 21:02:38
From Ver 6.15 of EVRC2A

STATUS / CLOCK
Check current time
[CURRENT TIME]
L2009/01/01 09:00:00
G2009/01/01 00:00:00
Indicates the local time types present time.

Indicates the GMT time types present time.
[CURRENT TIME]
L
G
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
223
9.4. Control Type

Move to MAIN MENU / STATUS / CONTROL TYPE to see EVRC2A information.
STATUS / CONTROL TYPE
Preset EVRC2A in information is displayed.
[CONTROL TYPE]
EVRC2A-Mn-xxxxxxx5xxSLLHP-xXN13DxXX
03-9707-FBFB-xx-6060
[CONTROL TYPE]
EVRC2A-Mn-xxxxxxx5xxSLLHP-xXN13DxX
03-9707-FBFB-xx-6060
EVRC2A information screen consists of 2 screens, first screen shows

firmware option, second screen shows firmware version. Screen is
changed by [] [] button.
NOTE
The letter located at ` in the CONTROL TYPE screen on the
side indicates whether ZCT is installed or not.
[CONTROL TYPE]
MPU: 7.00
CPU: 2.00
DSP: 1.00
If the letter located at ` is `X then it is a product that was

dispatched without ZCT installed(normal mode) while, if the
letter located at ` is `S then it is a product that was dispatched
with ZCT installed(special option) as per users request.
Depending on whether the product was dispatched with ZCT
installed or not, the setting range of the S.E.F in the PICKUP
CURRENT menu and the setting range of the S.E.F in the
CLPU-TYPE1 menu will be different.
224
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
10. METERING
The following values are contained in the metering elements of EVRC2A.
y
Current
Voltage(Source Side, Load Side)
Frequency
Synchronism Voltage
Power
Energy
Demand
System
Harmonics
Unbalance
NOTE : Unbalance is supported from version 6.12 of EVRC2A-N6,NT.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
225
10.1. Metering Elements

10.1.1. Current
The following values are contained in the current metering.
IA : Displays the measured phase A RMS current and phasor (A, Lag)
IB : Displays the measured phase B RMS current and phasor (A, Lag)
IC : Displays the measured phase C RMS current and phasor (A, Lag)
IG : Displays the measured ground RMS current and phasor (A, Lag)
ISG : Displays the measured sensitive earth RMS current and phasor (A, Lag)
I2 : Displays the calculated negative sequence RMS current (A)
You can confirm in MAIN MENU / METERING / CURRENT
MAIN MENU / METERING / CURRENT
[LINE CURRENT(A)]
A:
0 B:
0
C:
0 G:
0
SG:
0 I2:
0
[ZERO SEQ CURRENT]

0A
0.0 Lag
[PHASE A
0 A
[PHASE B
0 A
CURRENT]
0.0 Lag
CURRENT]
0.0 Lag
[POS SEQ CURRENT]

0A
0.0 Lag
[NEQ SEQ CURRENT]
0A
0.0 Lag
[PHASE C
0 A
[GROUND
0 A
CURRENT]
0.0 Lag
CURRENT]
0.0 Lag
[SENSTV CURRENT]
0 A 0.0 Lag
Display measured values of current and current phase per phase. Use [] [] button to check
metering information of current.
226
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
10.1.2. Voltage(Souce Side, Load Side)

The following values are contained in the voltage metering.
A-N : Displays the measured A-N RMS voltage and phasor(, Lag)
B-N : Displays the measured B-N RMS voltage and phasor(, Lag)
C-N : Displays the measured C-N RMS voltage and phasor(, Lag)
A-B : Displays the measured A-B RMS voltage and phasor(, Lag)
B-C : Displays the measured B-C RMS voltage and phasor(, Lag)
C-A : Displays the measured C-A RMS voltage and phasor(, Lag)
AVERAGE PHASE : Displays the calculated average of the RMS phase voltage()
AVERAGE LINE : Displays the calculated average of the RMS line voltage()
POS SEQ : Displays the calculated positive sequence RMS voltage and phasor(, Lag)
NEG SEQ : Displays the calculated negative sequence RMS voltage and phasor(, Lag)
ZERO SEQ : Displays the calculated zero sequence RMS voltage and phasor (, Lag)
You can confirm in MAIN MENU / METERING / S-VOLTAGE or L-VOLTAGE
MAIN MENU / METERING / S-VOLTAGE or L-VOLTAGE
[VOLTAGE (kV)]
AN: 0.00 AB: 0.00
BN: 0.00 BC: 0.00
CN: 0.00 CA: 0.00
[ZERO SEQ VOLTAGE]

0.00 kV 0.0 Lag
[AVERAGE PHASE]
VOLTAGE --> 0.00
[AVERAGE LINE]
VOLTAGE --> 0.00
[POS SEQ VOLTAGE]

0.00 kV 0.0 Lag
[NEG SEQ VOLTAGE]
0.00 kV 0.0 Lag
[PHASE
0.00
[PHASE
0.00
A-N
kV
B-N
kV
VOLTAGE]
0.0 Lag
VOLTAGE]
0.0 Lag
[PHASE
0.00
[LINE
0.00
C-N
kV
A-B
kV
VOLTAGE]
0.0 Lag
VOLTAGE]
0.0 Lag
[LINE
0.00
[LINE
0.00
B-C
kV
C-A
kV
VOLTAGE]
0.0 Lag
VOLTAGE]
0.0 Lag
Display measured values of voltage and voltage phase. Use [] [] button to check metering
information of voltage.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
227
10.1.3. Frequency
The following values are contained in the frequency metering.
y
Frequency()
Frequency decay rate(/Sec)
You can confirm in MAIN NEMU / METERING / FREQUENCY

MAIN MENU / METERING / FREQUENCY
[FREQUENCY (Hz)]
0.00
Hz
0.00 Hz/Sec
Frequency Display
10.1.4. Synchro Voltage

The following values are contained in the synchronism voltage metering.
y
Synchro Voltage()
Synchro Phasor(deg)
Synchro Frequency()
Synchrocheck delta(Phasor, voltage, frequency)
You can confirm in MAIN NEMU / METERING / SYNCHRO VOLTAGE

MAIN MENU / METERING / SYNCHRO VOLTAGE
[SYNCHRO VOLTAGE]
R:15.59 kV
0.0 Lag
S:15.59 kV 120.0 Lag
T:15.59 kV 240.0 Lag
Display measured values of Synchronism Voltage, Frequency and

Synchronism Delta. Use [] [] button to check metering information
of Synchronism voltage.
NOTE : The SYNCHRO VOLTAGE menu screen can vary
[SYNCHRO FREQUENCY]
50.00 Hz
according to the EVRC2A version.
[SYNCHRO DELTA]
A: 0.09 kV
0.0 Deg
B:15.59 kV 59.9 Deg
C:15.59 kV 359.9 Deg
[SYNCHRO DELTA]
50.00 Hz
228
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
10.1.5. Power
The following values are contained in the power metering.
y
Real power(MW)
Reactive power(Mvar)
Apparent power(MVA)
Power factor(%)
You can confirm in MAIN NEMU / METERING / POWER

MAIN MENU / METERING / POWER
[REAL POWER (MW)]
Pa: 0.00
Pb: 0.00 P3: 0.00
Pc: 0.00
[REACTIVE POW(MVAR)]
Pa: 0.00
Pb: 0.00 P3: 0.00
Pc: 0.00
[APPARENT POW(MWA)]
Pa: 0.00
Pb: 0.00 P3: 0.00
Pc: 0.00
[POWER FACTOR]
Pa: 0.0
Pb: 0.0 P3: 0.0
Pc: 0.0
Display measured values of power and power factor per phase. Use [] [] button to check
metering information of power.
10.1.6. Energy
The following values are contained in the energy metering.
y
Positive watthour(MWh) & start date (Year/Month/Date Hour:Minute,Second)
Negative watthour(MWh) & start date (Year/Month/Date Hour:Minute,Second)
Positive varhour(Mvar) & start date (Year/Month/Date Hour:Minute,Second)
negative varhour(Mvar) & start date (Year/Month/Date Hour:Minute,Second)
The updated rate of the energy meters is based on the Time Constant setting MAIN MENU /
SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND The meters will update every 1/15 of the Demand
Constant. For example : if the Demand Constant is set to 15 minutes, the energy meters will
update every 1 minute (15min 1/15 = 1 min)
The watt-hour and VAR-hour meters can be reset to 0 through PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY
SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA / ENERGY. The SD(start date) on LCD indicates the
time when the watt-hour and VAR-hour meters are reset.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
229
You can confirm in MAIN NEMU / METERING / ENERGY

MAIN MENU / METERING / ENERGY
[POSITIVE W/H(MWh)]
Pa:
0 Pb:
0
Pa:
0 Pb:
0
SD:09/12/31 00:00:00
[POSITIVE V/H(MVar)]
Pa:
0 Pb:
0
Pa:
0 Pb:
0
SD:09/12/31 00:00:00
[NEGATIVE W/H(MWh)]
Pa:
0 Pb:
0
Pa:
0 Pb:
0
SD:09/12/31 00:00:00
[NEGATIVE V/H(MVar)]
Pa:
0 Pb:
0
Pa:
0 Pb:
0
SD:09/12/31 00:00:00
Display energy. Use [] [] button to check energy information.
10.1.7. Demand
The following values are contained in the demand metering.
Actual demand & maximum demand with Value (Current, Real power, Reactive power) and Date
(Year/Month/Date Hour:Minute,Second)
During each demand value, the EVRC2A also captures and stores maximum values for the
measurements listed below. It functions as a standard maximum meter. When a new maximum
value is determined, the old value is replaced. A time stamp in the following format (Date:
Year/Month/Day and Time: Hour:Minute,Second), is placed with the latest maximum values.
The Max demand meters can be reset to 0 through PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP /
CLEAR SAVED DATA / MAX DEMAND
230
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
You can confirm in MAIN NEMU / METERING / DEMEND

MAIN MENU / METERING / DEMAND
[PHASE A CURRENT]
DEMAND:
0 A
MAX :
0 A
10/01/01 00:00:00
[PHASE B CURRENT]
DEMAND:
0 A
MAX :
0 A
10/01/01 00:00:00
[PHASE SG CURRENT]
DEMAND:
0 A
MAX :
0 A
10/01/01 00:00:00
[PHASE G CURRENT]
DEMAND:
0 A
MAX :
0 A
10/01/01 00:00:00
[PHASE C CURRENT]
DEMAND:
0 A
MAX :
0 A
10/01/01 00:00:00
[PHASE I2 CURRENT]
DEMAND:
0 A
MAX :
0 A
10/01/01 00:00:00
[PHASE A REAL POWER]

DEMAND: 0.00 MW
MAX : 0.00 MW
10/01/01 00:00:00
[PHASE B REAL POWER]

DEMAND: 0.00 MW
MAX : 0.00 MW
10/01/01 00:00:00
[P-A REACTIVE POWER]

DEMAND: 0.00 MWar
MAX : 0.00 MWar
10/01/01 00:00:00
[3P REAL POWER (MW)]

DEMAND: 0.00 MW
MAX : 0.00 MW
10/01/01 00:00:00
[PHASE C REAL POWER]

DEMAND: 0.00 MW
MAX : 0.00 MW
10/01/01 00:00:00
[P-B REACTIVE POWER]

DEMAND: 0.00 MWar
MAX : 0.00 MWar
10/01/01 00:00:00
[P-C REACTIVE POWER]

DEMAND: 0.00 MWar
MAX : 0.00 MWar
10/01/01 00:00:00
[3P REACTIVE POWER]

DEMAND: 0.00 MWar
MAX : 0.00 MWar
10/01/01 00:00:00
[DEMAND CURRENT
A:
0 B:
C:
0 G:
SG:
0 I2:
(A)]
0
0
0
Demand Current, Real power and Reactive power Display.

Use [] [] keys to move to next value.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
231
10.1.8. System
The following values are contained in the system metering.
y
Board power(12, +5V)
Temperature()
Battery voltage(V)
Gas pressure(Bar)
NOTE : According to recloser type, there may be no gas pressure measurement.
You can confirm in MAIN NEMU / METERING / SYSTEM

MAIN MENU / METERING / SYSTEM
[ SYSTEM METER]
+12:12.35 12:-12.38
+5 : 5.12 TMP:27.58
BAT:27.44 GAS: 0.00
System metering display.
10.1.9. Unbalance
The following values are contained in the unbalance metering.
y
Voltage unbalance(V2/V1) Source Side
Voltage unbalance(V2/V1) Load Side
You can confirm in MAIN NEMU / METERING / UNBALANCE

MAIN MENU / METERING / SYSTEM
[UNBALANCE- %]
SOURCE-VOLT:
0
LOAD-VOLT:
0
CURRENT:
0
Unbalance metering display.
NOTE : This menu is supported from version 6.12 of EVRC2A-N6,NT.
232
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
10.1.10. Harmonics
The following values are contained in harmonics metering.
y
y
y
y

1st~7th Harmonic of Voltage
THD of Current
THD of Voltage
You can confirm in MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS

MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS
[HARMONICS]
>1.THD
>2.Current-A
>3.Current-B
>4.Current-C
>5.Voltage-A
>6.Voltage-B
>7.Voltage-C
Current and Voltage Harmonics display.
THD
You can confirm in MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS / THD.
MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS / THD
[Total Har Dis(%)]
>Ia :
0 Va :
0
>Ib :
0 Vb :
0
>Ic :
0 Vc :
0
This menu is to display the total harmonic distortion of current and

voltage.
Current-A
You can confirm in MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS / Current-A.
MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS / Current-A
This menu is to display the 1st~7th harmonic of current through phase
A.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
233
Current-B(C)
The same Menu as Current-A function.
You can confirm in MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS / Current-B(C).
Voltage-A
You can confirm in MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS / Voltage-A.
MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS / Current-A
This menu is to display the 1st~7th harmonic and THD of voltage in
phase A.
Voltage -B(C)
The same Menu as Voltage-A function.
You can confirm in MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS / Voltage-B(C).
234
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
10.2. Accuracy
The harmonic components of current and voltage are removed from the input voltage and current
parameters, so all measurements based on these quantities respond to the fundamental
components only.
Measurements
Parameters
Unit
Accuracy
Range
1% of 2CT
20CT
1%
Phase A RMS Current

Phase B RMS Current
CURRENT
Phase C RMS Current

Phase G RMS Current
Phase SEF RMS Current
AN (AB) RMS Voltage
BN (BC) RMS Voltage
VOLTAGE
CN (CA) RMS Voltage

RN (RS) RMS Voltage
SN (ST) RMS Voltage*
TN (TR) RMS Voltage*
SYMMETRICAL
I1, I2, 3I0
1% of 2CT
COMPONENTS
V1, V2, 3V0
1%
Rate
0.02
1.000 to 1.000
MW
2%
32.000 to 32.000
MVar
2%
32.000 to 32.000
MVA
2%
32.000 to 32.000
MWH
2%
32000 to 32000
MVarH
2%
32000 to 32000
2%
A/B/C, 3 Real Power
MW
2%
A/B/C, 3 Reactive Power
MVar
2%
POWER FACTOR
3REAL POWER
Phase A, B, C
3 Phase
Phase A, B, C
3 Phase
3REACTIVE
Phase A, B, C
POWER
3 Phase
3APPARENT
Phase A, B, C
POWER
3 Phase
WATT-HOURS
VAR-HOURS
Phase A, B, C
3 Phase
Phase A, B, C
3 Phase
Phase A/B/C/RG Current
DEMAND
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
235

Measurements
FREQUENCY
Parameters
A-N (A-B) Source Voltage
R-N (R-S) Load Voltage
Unit
Accuracy
Range
0.02
40.00~70.00
1%
0% to 100%
1%
0% to 100%

st
HARMONICS
UNBALANCE
th
1 ~7 Harmonic of Voltage
THD of Current
3%
0% to 100%
THD of Voltage
3%
0% to 100%
Voltage unbalance(V2/V1) in source side
2%
0% to 999%
2%
0% to 999%
2%
0% to 999%
Voltage unbalance(V2/V1) in load side

If the VT connection type is set to delta, all single phase voltage quantities are displayed as zero.
236
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
11. MAINTENANCE
EVRC2A has maintenance function for following items.
y
COUNTERS
WEAR MONITOR
OUTPUT RELAY TEST
POWER QUALITY - Option
11.1. Counters
EVRC2A records counter related with system operation. The recorded counter items are below.
In order to check counter information, go to MAINTENANCE / COUNTERS. For more detail
information, refer to 8.3.1. Trip Counter Explanation.
y
Trip
Fault
System Restart
11.2. Wear Monitor

EVRC2A displays the each phases contact wear of the recloser. In order to check information of
the reclosers contact wear, go to MAINTENANCE / WEAR MONITOR, For more detail
information, refer to 8.4.1. Recloser Wear Explanation.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
237
11.3. Output Relay Test

EVRC2A is capable to perform the output test of the relay output ports(1~8). For the output test,
go to MAINTENANCE / OUTPUT RELAY TEST menu.
MAINTENANCE / OUTPUT RELAY TEST
[OUTPUT RELAY TEST]

SELECT RELAY :RLY 1
Select output signal at for testing.

Press [ENT] button and then is shown.
Press [FUN] button at and then is shown. The output signal has
[OUTPUT RELAY TEST]

SELECT RELAY :RLY 1
Press <FUN> : Start
Press <ESC> : Cancel
been asserted for 2 sec. If the test is completed, the message, END
TESTING, is shown and then back to the previous menu.
If the [ESC] button is press at , is shown and the output test is
canceled.
[OUTPUT RELAY TEST]

SELECT RELAY :RLY 1
Press <FUN> : Start
TESTING
[OUTPUT RELAY TEST]

SELECT RELAY :RLY 1
Press <FUN> : Start
TEST Canceled
238
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
11.4. Power Quality - Option

11.4.1. Power Quality Explanation
EVRC2A records the related number of times and duration when the outage or
sag/swell/unbalance occurs. Especially Supply Outage and Power Quality counter are operated
depending on power quality function set in SYSTEM SETUP menu. User can confirm in
MAIN MENU/ MAINTENANCE/POWER QUALITY.
MAIN MENU / MAINTENANCE / POWER QUALITY
[SUPPLY OUTAGE]
T-Time
T-Cnt
S:
L:
[SUPPLY OUTAGE]
T-Time
T-Cnt
S: 0000/00/00 0000
L: 0000/00/00 0000
[PQ COUNT] SAG SWELL
A Phase:
B Phase:
C Phase:
[PQ COUNT] SAG

A Phase: 31012
B Phase: 31011
C Phase: 31029
SWELL
31003
31002
31023
[PQ COUNT] UNBALANCE

SOURCE-VOLT :
LOAD-VOLT
:
CURRENT
:
[PQ COUNT] UNBALANCE

SOURCE-VOLT :
000
LOAD-VOLT
:
000
CURRENT
:
000
It indicates the time of outage on a power source side. The time of

outage is displayed as hour/minute/second.
It indicates the number of times of outage on a power source side.
It indicates the time of outage on a load side. The time of outage is
displayed as hour/minute/second.
It indicates the number of outage on a load side.
They indicate the numbers of sag on A,B,C phase.
They indicate the numbers of swell on A,B,C phase.
It indicates the number of voltage unbalance on a source side.
It indicates the number of voltage unbalance on a load side.
It indicates the number of current unbalance.
NOTE : The number of times and the hour do not increase
during the outage if the power of EVRC2A is off. The
number of times and the hour of outage will be recorded
by the end of outage.
NOTE : These counter for unbalance are supported from version
6.12 of EVRC2A-N6,NT.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
239

1) Function Setting
For more details, please refer to 6.10 Power Quality-Option.
Select 10. P-Quality Count in PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR
SAVED DATA to clear the Supply Outage Counter and Power Quality Counter.
240
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
12. EVENT RECORDER

EVRC2A has recording function for following items.
y
FAULT CYCLE WAVEFORM CAPTURE
SYSTEM EVENT RECORDER
LOAD PROFILE
DIAGNOSTIC EVENT RECORDER
FAULT TRIP - Option
POWER QUALITY - Option
12.1. Waveform Capture

In case of Fault, Waveform Capture records 32 Data of 15-Cycle with 16-Smple per 1 Cycle
resolution.
Fault cycle summary is displayed on LCD screen
Captured fault waveforms can be showed by the interface software.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
241
MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / FAULT CYCLE
[NO-]
IA:
IB:
IC:
IG:
10/01/01 19:51:58
[NO-] Locate: --
IS:
IQ:
10/01/01 19:51:58
Ex>
Move to MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / FAULT CYCLE to

see Fault cycle summary
y
To see previous value, press [] key.
To see next value, press [] key.
On screen use [] or [] key to see , screen in term.

Fault No: There are 32 events are recorded and the latest event is
displayed in advance.
Fault Type
[NO-01] Fault Pickup

IA:
0 IB:
0
IC:
0 IG:
0
10/01/01
19:51:58
[NO-01] Locate: --IS:

0
IQ:
0
10/01/01
19:51:58
Fault Pickup
27: Under Voltage Trip
59: Over Voltage Trip
81: Under Frequency Trip
A, B, C, G: Fault phase shows LED ON.
S: Sensitive Earth Fault
Q: Negative Sequence Fault
O: Other Trip(Demand Current Trip, Loss of Phase etc.)
Each phase fault current unit : Ampere(A)
Event occurred time

: Year/Month/Day(or Month/Day/Year) Hour: Minute: Second
Fault Location
Indicated when Fault Locater function is ON.
For more details about settings of Fault Locater function, refer to
8.6. Fault Locator.
242
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
12.1.1. Trigger Source

y
Occurred Protection element pickup
Occurred Fault trip command active
Depending on pickup size, if interval between pickup and trip is within 15 cycles including
prefault cycles(4 cycles), then record pickup cycles. But if the interval between pickup and trip
are not within 15 cycles, then record pickup cycles and trip cycles. These operations are very
useful to examine.
12.1.2. Data Channels

Stores following data :
y
5 currents : Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, Isef
3 voltages (Va, Vb, Vc) : not passed digital-filter
85 logic input states
8Ch output relays
8Ch Inputs
12.1.3. Sample Rate

Captures one period of 16 sampling per cycle.
12.1.4. Storage capacity

The capacity of storage is last 32 events of 15cycles.

1) ON/OFF Setting
Fault Cycle waveform capture function can be set ON/OFF by user.
PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP \ EVENT RECORDER \ Fault Cycle
[EVENT RECORDER]
>Fault Cycle:
ON
Len' of Pre F:
4
Load Profile:
ON
Range
OFF, ON
Default ON
Step
ON : Record fault cycle waveform.

OFF : No record of fault cycle waveform.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
243
2) Pre-fault length Setting

User sets the length of pre-fault before Trigger.
PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP \ EVENT RECORDER \ Len' of Pre F
[EVENT RECORDER]
Fault Cycle:
ON
>Len' of Pre F:
4
Load Profile:
ON
0 ~ 14
Range
Default 4
Step
Usually sets 4 cycles as default.

Select 1. FAULT CYCLE in PRIMARY SETTING / REALY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED
DATA to clear the stored value.
12.1.6. Interface software

Interface software shows Data and captured waveform (below)
Figure 12-1. Data and captured waveform showed by Interface Software
244
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
12.2. System Event Recorder

Record changes of system status up to 2048 lists when trigger source asserted and deasserted.
MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / SYSTEM STATUS
[NO-0001] SLEEP MODE
STATUS : LO/DEASSERT
DATE : 10/01/22
TIME : 19:51:58:387
Confirm in
MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / SYSTEM STATUS

y
Protection Element
52A Contact
Sequence status
Front panel control
AC supply
External control
Fail operation
y
y
y
y
External input status

System alarm etc.
V1(Source), V2(Load)
Power Quality detect
NOTE : For more details about Trigger Source, refer to Appendix C. EVENT TEXT &
DESCRIPTION.
12.2.2. Trigger Time

Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.
12.2.3. Trigger type

Stores type of Trigger source : Pickup(assert) or Dropout(deassert)
12.2.4. Storage Capacity

Stores last 2048 events.

System automatically maintains system event recorder. User can clear only stored events.
Select 2.SYSTEM STATUS in PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR
SAVED DATA to clear.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
245

Interface software shows system status events.
Figure 12-2. System Status Events showed by Interface Software
246
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
12.3. Load Profile

Record the Demand value when reaches in setting time (5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60minute). Load
profile has 5120 Banks that can store values of 213 days if setting time is 60minute.
LOAD PROFILE
CURRENT (A) [0001]

A:
0 B:
0
C:
0 G:
0
10/01/22
21:45:00
REAL POW(MW) [0001]

A :
0 B :
0
C :
0 3P:
0
10/01/22
21:45:00
Confirm in
MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / LOAD PROFILE
y
On screen , use [] or [] key to see , , , screen in

term.
REAC POW(Mvar)[0001]
A :
0 B :
0
C :
0 3P:
0
10/01/22
21:45:00
PF&ENERGY-3P [0001]
P-F(%) :
0.0
MWh:
0.0 MVh: 0.0
10/01/22
21:45:00

y
Demand Current(A, B, C, G)
Demand Real Power(A, B, C, 3)
Demand Reactive Power(A, B, C, 3)
Demand Power Factor( 3)
Demand Energy - Positive Watthour(3), Positive Varhour(3)

y
5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 Minute

y
Stores 5120 events
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
247

1) ON/OFF Setting
Load Profile can be set ON/OFF by user.
PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / Load Profile
[EVENT RECORDER]
Fault Cycle:
ON
Len' of Pre F:
4
>Load Profile:
ON
Range
OFF, ON
Default ON
Step
ON : Records load profile.

OFF : No record of load profile.
2) Recording time interval setting

PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / L.P save time(m)
[EVENT RECORDER]
Len' of Pre F:
4
Load Profile:
ON
>L.P save time(m):15
Range
5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min
Default 15
Step
Sets the interval time between Records.
12.3.5. Stored value Clear

Select 3. LOAD PROFILE in PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED
DATA to clear.
248
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

Interface software shows load profile data.
Figure 12-3. Load Profile Data showed by Interface Software
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
249
12.4. Diagnostic Event Recorder

Record diagnostic events up to 512 lists when trigger source asserted and deasserted.
MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / DIAGNOSTIC
[NO-001] GAS HIGH
STATUS : LO/DEASSERT
DATE : 10/01/22
TIME : 19:51:58:387
Confirm in
MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / DIAGNOSTIC

y
SYSTEM POWER : AC, Battery, 12V, +5V
A/D Conversion : A/D Fail, Reference Voltage1, Reference Voltage 2
POWER DOWN MODE
GAS STATUS etc
. NOTE ) According to a recloser type, there may be no diagnosis of gas pressure status.
y
NOTE : For more details about Trigger Source, refer to Appendix C. EVENT TEXT &
DESCRIPTION.

Monitors status of Trigger source in every 1/4 cycle
12.4.3. Trigger type

Stores type of Trigger source : Pickup(assert) or Dropout(deassert)


System automatically maintains Diagnostic event recorder. User can clear only stored events.
Select 4.DIAGNOSTIC in PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED
DATA to clear.
250
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

Interface software shows Diagnostic events.
Figure 12-4. Diagnostic Events showed by Interface Software
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
251
12.5. Fault Trip Event Recorder - Option

When fault trip occurs, fault time and fault current of each phase are recorded.
MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / FAULT TRIP
Confirm in MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / FAULT TRIP.
[/]
IA:
IB:
IC:
IG:
10/01/01 00:00:00
On screen use [] or [] key to see , screen in term.
[/]
IS:
IQ:
10/01/01
Display the order of the fault trip occurrence and events from the
most recent fault to the oldest fault.
Total 512 events can be stored.
00:00:00
Display fault sequence(shot counter).

Ex>
Display fault type.
[001/1]
IA:
0
IC:
0
10/01/01
ABCG
IB:
0
IG:
0
00:00:00
[001/1]
IS:
0
IQ:
0
10/01/01
ABCG
Display current of each phase when fault occurs.

Display fault time.
00:00:00

y
252
Target elements
-
A: A Phase Overcurrent Trip
B: B phase Overcurrent Trip
C: C phase Overcurrent Trip
G: G phase Overcurrent Trip
S: Sensitive Earth Overcurrent Trip
Q: Negative Sequence Overcurrent Trip
27: Under Voltage Trip
59: Over Voltage Trip
81: Under Frequency Trip
O: Other Trip(Demand Current Trip, Loss of Phase etc.)
fault current[A]: A , B, C and G phase currents, SEF current, Negative Sequence current
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY



System automatically maintains fault trip event recorder. User can clear only stored events.
Select 9. Fault Trip in PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA
to clear.

Interface software shows Fault Trip events.
Figure 12-5. Fault Trip Events showed by Interface Software
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
253
12.6. Power Quality Event Recorder - Option

EVRC2A always monitors the voltage on both power source side and load side, and records the
data of power outage in order to analyze the cause when the outage is detected on either side.
When the outage is detected, EVRC2A records the outage time and duration. Besides, it also
records the occurrence time of sag/swell event and unbalance event.
Power Quality event can be viewed at MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / POWER
QUALITY
MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / POWER QUALITY
Displays the order of the event occurrence and events from the
most recent event to the oldest event.
Total 512 events can be stored.
[NO-001]
OUTAGE-S
OT: 0000 h 00 m 00 s
DATE : 10/01/01
TIME : 00:00:00:000
[NO-]
OT:
DATE :
TIME :
Displays the event type and detect value.

-
OUTAGE-S : power supply side outage
OUTAGE-L : load side outage
SAG-A(B,C) : A(B,C) phase sag.
SWL-A(B,C) : A(B,C) phase swell.
UBL-SV : Voltage Unbalance on source side
UBL-LV : Voltage Unbalance on load side
UBC : Current Unbalance
Displays the duration of outage as in hour/ minute/second and

cycle message added after duration.
Displays the time of outage, sag, swell or unbalance detected.
NOTE : It does not record outage or sag/swell event if the power
of EVRC2A was off during the outage.
254
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

y
Target elements
-
Source Outage
Load Outage
Sag/Swell
Voltage Unbalance
Current Unbalance
Monitoring elements
- Source side Voltage
- Load side Voltage
- Current



1) Function and Outage duration Settings
Refer to menu, 11.4.2 Related Setting Menu.
System automatically maintains power quality event recorder. User can clear only stored
events. Select 11. P-Quality Event in PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR
SAVED DATA to clear.

All the supply outage events can be viewed at interface software.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
255
Figure 12-6. Power Quality Events showed by Interface Software
256
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13. INSTALLATION
13.1. User Interface Door and Power Switch
Figure 13-1. User Interface Door and Power Switch

User Interface Door
User Interface Door has two magnets upper and down(or top and bottom).To open the door, pull
the handle.
Control Power Switch
After opening the User Interface Door, you see 2 Switches. Left side switch is for Battery Power,
right side one is for AC Power. Turning on either one of two activates control.
AC Power Outlet
For user convenience, AC Power Outlet is located on User Interface Door. Fuse is installed for
safety from overload. Location of fuse is referred to Figure 13-5. Inner Structure
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
257
13.2. Vent and Outer Cover
Figure 13-2. Air Vent and Outer Cover

Outer Cover
It is for blocking the direct ray of light to delay raising temperature inside of Control Cubicle.
The gap between control cubicle and cover is 10mm.
Air Vent
To protect control part from humidity by temperature fluctuation, Vents are on left and right side
covered with Outer Cover.
258
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13.3. Dimensions and Mounting Plan
Figure 13-3. Dimensions and Mounting Plan

y
EVRC2A has Small size and Large size depending on Recloser Type.
Small size is available for EVR1, EVR2, Large size is available for EVR3.
Large size is able to make User available Space larger, the space unit is referred to
Figure 13-6. Mount Accessories Dimensions
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
259
Standard for EVR1, EVR2 is small size and for EVR3 is large size.
EVR1 (Recloser Rated Voltage : 15.5) / EVR2 (27) / EVR3 (38)
For installation on a Pole, the lifting hole is indicated.
Weight of EVRC2A small size is 85 and large size is 90.
EVRC2A should be fixed top and bottom with 16(5/8") Bolt.
There is an Exit hole for external cable that can be connected to additional functioning
hardware.
The diameter of the hole is 22(0.866") and two of Standard Receptacle "MS22" Series
can be extended.
260
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13.4. Earth Wiring Diagram
Figure 13-4. Earth Wiring Diagram

y
After installation of Control cubicle, connect the ground.
Earth Terminal can connect with core of cable size up to 12(0.470") diameter.
Earth cable from Pole Neutral and from EVRC2A Earth Terminal must be connected to the
ground.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
261
13.5. Inner Structure
Figure 13-5. Inner Structure

Controller Power NFB (No Fuse Breaker)
Left side switch is for Battery and right side one is for 220Vac(or 110Vac option).
Heater
Optional Heater is 40W
Battery
Use 2 of 12Vdc in series. Use () screwdriver for replacement.
Fuse
TF1, TF2, TF3 are for circuit protection, refers to (see 13.20. Fuse)
Terminal Block
Place for AC Power line, there are two ports for user.
User Available Space
Space for additional hardware connection. Installation and space size refers to Figure 13-6.
Mount Accessories Dimensions.
262
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13.6. Mount Accessories Dimensions
Figure 13-6. Mount Accessories Dimensions

y
Shows base plate measurements that can be attached in User Available Space.
On Base plate, 10/M6 Nut is used to fix the base plate.
Available space for height of base plate is from 101.6 (4) to 177.8 (7)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
263
13.7. User-Available DC Power

Table 13-1. User-Available DC Power
Voltage Rating
Voltage Range
Maximum Power output
Positions
24Vdc
2025Vdc
40W Continuous
Side Panel CN5
15Vdc
14.015.5Vdc
60W 60second
(1-VCC/+)
12Vdc
11.012.5Vdc
Short 1second
(2-AGND/-)
Standard Voltage : 12Vdc / User can select Voltage Rating

y
30W DC Power is provided. In case of the necessity of larger than 30W, additional power
should be attached. For more details, contact manufacturer. Input of the additional power is
referred to Figure 13-7. Terminal Block and Fuses
Remove cable coating at the end of cable length of 8mm(0.315). With using () CN5
connector terminal on side panel should be connected to Wire size AWG24 up to 12.
To change Voltage ratings, disconnect Jumper Pin in JP3 Figure 13-31. ANALOG
BOARD, and connect Jumper Pin to either JPI (24Vdc) or JP2 (15Vdc). Be sure of the
voltage rating due to disassembly.
When overload, automatically circuit breaks current. In case long-term overload time, there
is a fuse on analog circuits to protect circuits from failure.
264
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13.8. Terminal Block and Fuses
Figure 13-7. Terminal Block and Fuses

y
Caution for an electric shock due to AC Power loaded in Terminal block.
Standard AC Power is 220Vac(Optional AC Power is 110Vac).
AC Power input terminal 1, 2 are connected from Receptacle to Terminal block. Terminal 3
is the ground.
Terminal 4, 5 are for connecting additional AC Power. Terminal 4 is connected with TF3 for
protection, terminal 5 is in series with AC Power
On TF3 Fuse, AC Power Outlet is connected with 40W Heater. Reference for branching.
In AC line connection, blue wired line is for Neutral, white wired line is for Phase wire,
green wired line is for the ground.
Terminal 6, 7, 8 are spare for Recloser 52 contact.
Terminal 9, 10 are for User Available Terminal block. In need of more terminals, use User
Available Space.
52 Contact Auxiliary Specs

Rating (Resistive load) : 30Vdc 5A / 125Vdc 0.6A / 250Vdc 0.3A
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
265
13.9. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram VD Type
Figure 13-8. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram - VD Type

y
Wiring diagram of EVRC2A standard.
CN1 has different system wirings depending on User system. In Figure 13-8. EVRC2A
Wiring Diagram - VD Type, CN1 is marked as Earthing System. For non-Earthing system,
refer to Figure 13-11. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram
CN2 is Voltage Input Connector. Figure 13-8. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram - VD Type is
VD(CVD(Capacitor Voltage Divider) or RVD(Resistance Voltage Divider)) type and
Figure 13-9. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram - VT Type is VT type.
VT type is standard and VD type is for optional. VD type and VT type are not exchangeable.
266
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13.10. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram - VT Type
Figure 13-9. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram - VT Type

y
Figure 13-9. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram - VT Type is wiring diagram of VT type of which
Voltage Input is optional.
CN2 is Voltage Input Connector. For wiring, refer to Figure 13-13. VT Wiring Diagram
VD type and VT type are not exchangeable. VT type is standard and VD type is optional.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
267
13.11. Side Panel

Current Inputs
IA,IB,IC,IN,SEF
CN2 Voltage Inputs
VA,VB,VC, VR,VS, VT
CN3 AC24V IN
Relay Module AC Power Input
CN4 BATT` IN
Relay Module DC Power Input
CN5 POWER OUT - Option
User-Available DC Voltage Source
CN6 CONTROL
Recloser Open, Close
CN7 UPS
Monitors and controls Close and Trip Power
CN8 RECLOSER STATUS
Open, Close, Lock, Pressure
CN9 CN10 OUTPUTS and INPUTS - Option
OUT1~OUT5(A Contact), OUT6~OUT7(B Contact)
OUT8(ALARM)
IN01~IN08
PORT2 - Option
SERIAL RS232
PORT3 - Option
SERIAL RS485/422
PORT4 - Option
ETHERNET
NOTE :
1) I/O Terminal (CN10, CN9) has functions to
control basic operation of Recloser and can be
connected with SCADA System for use.
2) Remove the coating of cable length of 8
(0.315"). Side panel connector for user should be
connected to Wire size AWG24 to 12
268
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Figure 13-10. Side Panel
13.12. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram

Current IG is connected with Side Panel
IG(A07,A08)
in
Earthing
System.
SEF(A09,A10) should be connected, so

called JUMPER
IG Input Current Range
y
0.5A Nominal
2A continuous
25A 1 second
Burden : 0.19VA(0.5A)
Current IG should be connected with

SEF(A09,A10) of Side Panel in.
Non Earthing System.
IG(A07,A08) should be connected to each
other.
SEF Input Current Range
y
0.05A Nominal
0.16A Continuous
0.6A 1 second
Burden : 0.0375VA(0.05A)
Figure 13-11. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram
Recloser Phase should match with User system. Refer to Figure 13-14. Phase Rotation
CT Phase rotation must be arranged comparing with Voltage Inputs Phase rotation.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
269
13.13. VD Wiring Diagram
Figure 13-12. VD Wiring Diagram

y
VD(CVD(Capacitor Voltage Divider) or RVD(Resistance Voltage Divider)) measures

Voltage with using Capacitor or Resistance installed in each Bushing of Recloser.
VD Type and VT Type are not exchangeable.
Current Inputs and Voltage Inputs should be the same phase. If CT Inputs changed Phase
rotation, Voltage Inputs phase should be re-arranged.
Option CVD 15, 27, 38 Class
Option RVD 15, 27 Class
270
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13.14. VT Wiring Diagram
Figure 13-13. VT Wiring Diagram

y
VD(CVD or RVD) Type can not be used when VT(Voltage Transformer) Type was selected.
VT wiring should match Current Inputs.
Voltage Inputs VA, VB, VC, VR, VS, VT

Input Voltage Range : Vphase-Vcom Continuous < 300V
Burden : 0.6VA(300V), 0.2VA(220V), 0.05VA(120V), 0.02VA(67V)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
271
13.15. Current and Voltage Inputs Phase Rotation
Figure 13-14. Phase Rotation

y
For Metering accuracy, phase rotations of User system and Recloser should be the same.
Figure 13-14. Phase Rotation shows the same phase rotation between User System and
Recloser.
If the phase rotation is not the same in User system and Recloser, correct CT and VD(CVD
or RVD) wiring in side panel to be matched.
272
EVR Recloser phase A is the Bushing the nearest from Trip lever on the side.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13.16. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions

Table 13-2. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions
Pin
Function
Pin
Function
C.T Phase C
52 common(Auxiliary)
C.T Phase B
52b(Auxiliary)
C.T Phase A
52a(Auxiliary)
C.T Common(G)
Close and Trip Coil Common
VD Source Phase C
VD Source Phase B
VD Source Phase A
Close Coil
VD Load side Phase T
Close Coil
VD Load side Phase S
Close Coil
VD Load side Phase R
not connected
Pressure Sensor Output(controller input)
Trip Coil
not connected
not connected
Pressure Sensor Power AGND
Trip Coil
Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc
Trip Coil
Cable shield and Ground
not connected
not connected
Recloser Status 69b(locked a connect)
Recloser Status Common(24Vdc)
Recloser Status 52b(Monitored Trip)
Recloser Status 52a(Monitored Close)
not connected
not connected
Control EVRC2A Receptacle : MS3102 28-21S(Female)
Recloser Receptacle : MS3102 28-21P(Male)
Control Cable : Shield Cable 8meter(31.5)
Cable Shielding layer is connected to Pin R
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
273
Figure 13-15. Control Receptacle

Figure 13-15. Control Receptacle shows Female Receptacle installed in Control EVRC2A.
274
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13.17. Control Cable Assembling / De-assembling

y
Do not turn Plug body when Control Cable assembling/de-assembling.
For Control Cable assembling, connect with Receptacle check based with Pin Guide position.
Following notices are suggested.
Turn Plug nut clockwise carefully to prevent Pin winding or out of gearing.
Push Plug Body little by little with shaking left and right side into Receptacle; repeat this
to complete connection.
Turn Plug nut to tighten for Control Cable de-assembling, do the opposite way of Control
Cable assembling
Figure 13-16. Recloser Receptacle
Figure 13-17. Control Cable
13.18. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions

Table 13-3. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions
Pin
Function
AC Power Input
AC Power Input (Neutral)
not connected
Standard Input Voltage of Control EVRC2A is

220Vac(110Vac option).
Figure 13-18. Power Receptacle
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
275
13.19. AC Power Cable

TYPE : MS22-2S(Female)
Cable Length : 2C-3.5 6meter(236")
A PIN Wire Color : White(Phase)
B PIN Wire Color : Black(Neutral)
C PIN : not connected
13.20. Fuses
Table 13-4. Fuses
Positions
Terminal Block TF1
Terminal Block TF2
Terminal Block TF3

Inside Relay Module F1
(Analog board)
(Analog board)
(Analog board)
(Analog board)
276
Rating /
Dimensions
Purpose
7A/220Vac
0.251.25"
Input Line of Transformer in UPS
15A/110Vac
(6.38531.75)
3A/220Vac
0.25"1.25"
6A/110Vac
(6.38531.75)
Control EVRC2A AC Power.
0.25"1.25"
AC Power outlet and Heater
External AC - Power Input
10A
1A
1A
2A
5A
(6.38531.75)
0.197"0.787"
(520)
0.197"0.787"
(520)
0.197"0.787"
(520)
0.197"0.787"
(520)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Module AC Power
Input Line of Transformer in
User Available AC Power

Trip Control
Close Control
Relay Module Power
User-Available DC Power
13.21. Battery and Control run time

Table 13-5. Battery Specs
Nominal capacity
24V/17A (12V2pcs)
Service life Time
5 years
Battery Connector(CN11)
Molex Connector 3191-2R
Controller run time
40hours
Recharge Time
SOC: ~80%/ 15hours
NOTE : Battery capacity can be changed by request of a user.

y
Sealed lead - acid Battery Type, use 12Vdc 2 Batteries in series.
Harness connector(CN11) from Battery Terminal is connected to

battery switch NFB1. In order to store Battery for a long time,
turn NFB1 OFF without disconnecting Harness connector.
The self-discharge rate of batteries is approximately 3% per

month when batteries are stored at an ambient temperature of
+20(+68). The self-discharge rate varies with ambient
temperature.
The approximate depth of discharge or remaining capacity of an

battery can be empirically determined from Figure 13-20. Open
Figure 13-19. Battery
Circuit Voltage
Turn off NFB1 to disconnect Battery from circuits. Remove

Battery Connector CN11(3191-2R) and measure the battery
voltage.
If the battery voltage is less than 22.5Vdc, the residual capacity is
0%. The voltage can be recharged but requires maintenance.
24Vdc Battery supplies Relay Module and UPS Module through

NFB1(Battery Switch).
Relay Module supplies through CN4 Connector in Side Panel and
UPS Module supplies through P2 Connector of UPS Module.
Figure 13-20. Open Circuit Voltage
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
277
13.22. Charge Circuit

Charger uses current-control-circuit to prevent sudden-recharge and use voltage-steady-circuit to
prevent over-recharge.
Charge inspection use 24Vac the same power as Relay Module has.
Disconnecting CN11 may cause spark, turn off NFB1(Battery Switch) and NFB2(Ac Power
switch) before disconnect CN11. Limit Current measuring should be tested on 10 in series with
CD Ammeter.
Charge Voltage : 27.5Vdc(0.5V)
Charge Current : 300mAdc(50mAdc)
NOTE : The battery charger is fully temperature compensated.
Battery charger capacity can be changed by request of a user.
13.23. Battery Change

Battery Mounting consists of two of Bolt M6-15L. Battery Wire consists of M5 Bolt & Nut and
is connected to Battery Terminal. Bolt can be replaced using with (+) screwdriver.
For Battery wire de-assembling, disconnect Jumper wire first and disconnect CN11 wire(red and
black). When CN11 is disconnected first, battery short is considered in case of workers mistake.
For Battery wire connection, connect CN11 wire (red and black) first and connect Jumper wire
later. Reference Figure 13-19. Battery
13.24. Battery Protection

Battery protection is to protect the battery from over-discharge by disconnecting the battery from
the control circuit when AC power is lost and before the battery is completely discharged. CPU
measures the battery voltage and when the battery is below 21 volts, timer is operated and after
10 minutes, Latch Relay is set to disconnect the battery circuit.
On Power Down status, if the external power is re-supplied or the Power Switch is changed from
OFF to ON, Control Module is operated as normal.
When AC Power is not supplied, in order to operate it by Power Switch, OFF for 5 seconds and
turn it ON. When it is turned ON without Battery, it is Power downed after 10 minutes.
278
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13.25. Communications
1) RS232 Pin Functions for Port1 and Port2
Table 13-6. RS232 Pin Functions for Port1 and Port2
Pin
Serial Port1
Serial Port2
Definition
N/C
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
RXD
RXD
Receive Data
TXD
TXD
Transmit Data
N/C
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
GND
GND
Ground
N/C
DSR
Data Set Ready
N/C
RTS
Request To Send
N/C
CTS
Clear To Send
N/C
N/C
No Connection
Positions
User Interface Panel(Male)
Side Panel (Male)
Cable
CC201
CC201,202,203
Purposes
Maintenance
DNP
Figure 13-21. RS232 Port
2) RS232/485 Pin Functions for Port3
Figure 13-22. Port 3
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
279
Table 13-7. PORT3(RS-232/RS485) Pin Description

Pin(RS-232)
Signal
Description
Pin(RS-485)
Description
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
RS485+
RXD
Receive Data(IN)
RS485-
TXD
Transmit Data(OUT)
SG (Cable Shield)
DTR
Data Terminal Ready(OUT)
485 ON
GND
Ground
485 ON
DSR
Data Set Ready(IN)
RTS
Request To Send(OUT)
CTS
Clear To Send(IN)
N/C
No Connection
. Note) PORT3 provides RS-485 communication and uses Digital power and insulated
power of CPU Part for surge protection. Each terminal is Anti-Over-voltage.
To minimize the noise of communication line, Terminal Resistor is used in the both
end of the line and Twisted Shied Cable is advisable for connecting cable.
In order to use RS-485, the Pin4 and Pin5 of RS485 Port should be connected.
3) RJ-45 Pin Functions for Port4
Table 13-8. RJ-45Pin Functions for Port4
Pin
Port4
Pin
Port4
TX+
N/C
TX-
N/C
RX+
N/C
RX-
Purpose IEC60870-5-104
N/C
280
Figure 13-23. RJ-45 Port
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13.26. Communication Cables

1) Cable CC201: Connect to Computer
Figure 13-24. Cable CC201 (connect to computer)

2) Cable CC202: Connect to Modem, etc. - option
Figure 13-25. Cable CC202 (connect to modem, etc.)

3) Cable CC203: Connect to Modem, etc. - option
Figure 13-26. Cable CC203 (connect to modem, etc.)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
281
13.27. Hardware Block Diagram
Figure 13-27. Hardware Block Diagram
282
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13.28. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits
Figure 13-28. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits

CC
Close Coil
TC
Trip Coil
MC
Magnetic Contactor
Capacitor
IGBT
Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor
Fuse
UPS
Uninterruptible Power Supply
Recloser Trip and Close Power is charged from C1, C2, C3 in UPS module.
C1 is used for Trip power, C2, C3 are used for Close power.
Trip(Close) runs when IGBT is ON. MC runs and the charged Capacitor transfer the Power
to TC(CC), eventually Recloser runs.
F1, F2 are Fuses to protect IGBT from MC damage. These are on Analog Board.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
283
13.29. Uninterruptible Power Supply for Trip & Close
Figure 13-29. UPS Module Block Diagram

y
UPS Module charges Capacitor for Trip/Close. Its rated output voltage is 120Vdc.
Trip and Close Capacitor are individually located and do not affect to each other during Trip
and Close.
UPS Module runs by 120Vac Power or by Backup Battery.
Transformer in EVRC2A connected with External AC Power generates 120Vac.
Sealed lead-acid Type is used for Battery. Battery voltage does not run under 20Vac, runs
over 20Vdc.
284
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13.30. Main Board
Figure 13-30. MAIN BOARD

Indicates Firmware Upgrade Port, RTC(Real Time Clock), and main parts location. Also
indicates backup battery type.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
285
13.31. Analog Board
Figure 13-31. ANALOG BOARD

y
JP1, JP2, JP3 are Jumper Connecter, defining User Available DC Power Output Rating.
F1, F2 are use to protect IGBT for Close and Trip.
F3 is for Relay Module protection.
JP1, JP2, JP3 are Jumper Connectors and define User Available DC Power rating.
286
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13.32. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram
Figure 13-32. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram

Recloser EVR standard wiring diagram
y
CT Protection is automatically protected when Control Cable is disconnected.
The capacity of CVD is 20, and also automatically protected when Control Cable is
disconnected.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
287
13.33. Recloser EPR Wiring Diagram
Figure 13-33. Recloser EPR Wiring Diagram

Recloser EPR standard wiring diagram
y
CT Protection is automatically protected when Control Cable is disconnected.
The resistance of RVD is 100M, and also automatically protected when Control Cable is
disconnected.
288
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13.34. Recloser Current Transformer (CT)

Table 13-9. Current Transformer (CT)
Description
Pin
Function
C.T Phase C
CT Ratio : (1000:1/standard)
C.T Phase B
CT Resistance < 5
C.T Phase A
C.T Common(G)
13.35. Recloser Voltage Divider (VD)

Table 13-10. Capacitor Voltage Divider (VD)
Description
Pin
Function
CVD Source Phase C
EVR RECLOSER
CVD Source Phase B
1) Pin R is connected to Ground.
CVD Source Phase A
2) CVD Capacitance : 20
CVD Load side Phase T
3) For CVD Protection, MOV is connected between
CVD Load side Phase S
CVD Load side Phase R
EPR RECLOSER
RVD Source Phase C
1) Pin R is connected to Ground.
RVD Source Phase B
2) RVD Resistance : 10M
RVD Source Phase A
3) For RVD Protection, MOV is connected between
CVD Load side Phase T
Phase and Ground.
CVD Load side Phase S
For voltage measuring, use High Impedance AC
CVD Load side Phase R
Voltmeter(Digital Multimeter) at Output Pin.
Phase and Ground.
y
y
Voltage Measuring Method 1

measure MOV voltage.
(measure a voltage between MOV arms)
Voltage Measuring Method 2

Place the capacitor(C2) in parallel with MOV. and
measure MOV voltage.
Figure 13-34. VD Wiring Diagram
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
289
13.36. Recloser Pressure Sensor (Only EVR Type)

13.36.1. TYPE1 Sensor
It is used of Recloser manufactured before JUNE, 2005.
Table 13-11. EVR Pressure Sensor
Description
Pin
Function
Pressure Sensor Output
1) Sensor Power is delivered from
Pin P(+12Vdc0.5 %) and N(-)
2) Sensor Output is Pin L(+) and N(-)

3) SF6 Gas is the insulating material and is affected by depending on pressure (density).
4) Figure 13-35. Pressure Changes depending on Temperature and Sensor Output voltage
shows pressure changes depending on temperature and Sensor Output voltage depending on
pressure.
5) EVR has 0.5bar at 20
Figure 13-35. Pressure Changes depending on Temperature and Sensor Output voltage
290
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13.36.2. TYPE2 Sensor

It is used for Recloser manufactured after JULY, 2005.
Table 13-12. EVR Pressure Sensor
Description
Pin
Function
Pressure Sensor Output
1) Sensor Power is delivered from
Pin P(+9~30Vdc) and N(-)
2) Sensor Output is Pin L(+) and N(-)
5.0
4.5
Output voltage(Vdc)
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
-0.8 -0.7 -0.6 -0.5 -0.4 -0.3 -0.2 -0.1 0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
Pressure (bar)
Figure 13-36. Pressure Changes depending on Sensor Output voltage
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
291
13.37. Recloser 52 contact and 69 contact

Table 13-13. 52 contact and 69 contact
Description
Pin
69 is b Contact when unlocked.
Function
69b(Monitored locked)
Common(52 and 69)
52b(Monitored Trip)
52a(Monitored Close)
52 common(Auxiliary)
52b(Auxiliary)
52a(Auxiliary)
13.38. Recloser Trip and Close Coil

Table 13-14. Trip and Close Coil
Description
Pin
Function
1) Pin d, e and f are combined as one line.
2) Pin g, h and j are combined and placed as one
Close Coil
Close Coil
Close Coil
4) Close Coil Resistance : < 5
Trip Coil
5) Trip Coil Resistance : < 2
Trip Coil
Trip Coil
line
3) Pin m, p and r are combined and placed as one
line.
292
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOS
SER CONTR
ROL EVRC2A
A-N6,NT
http
p://www.enttecene.co.krr
13..39. Re
ecloser Test Kit
1) RTS
R 2010 Moodel tests EV
VRC2A by Faault Simulatiion.
2) RTS
R 2010 cann display Fuull Sequence of Trip timee, Trip currennt, Interval oon LCD screeen and
allso can varioously test Callibration Moode, OCR Mo
ode, Externaal Mode, Mannual Mode.
F
Figure
13-377. Recloser Test
Te Kit - RTS
S2010
Stan
ndard Ratin
ngs and Features
Tablee 13-15. Stan
ndard Ratinggs and Featu
ures
CLA
ASSIFICATION
N
RATINGS AND
A
FEATUR
RES
1.5Arms 3ch (Burden below 1)

Currrent output
4.5Arms1ch (3ch Paraallel)

Accuracy ( 1% or 0.4mA
A)
Voltaage output
Binaary input
Binaary output
7Vrms 4cch (Burden ov

ver 1)
Accuracy ( 1% or 0.02V
V)
BI01~02: DC12~150V
D
or
o Dry contactt(User select)
BI03~04: DC12~150V(P
D
Pulse below 1sec)
BO01~04
130mA/3500V, ON Resistance (below 35 )
Timee Accuracy
5ms
Weigght
6kg(RTS20010), 1.2kg(caable), 6kg AL Case
Dim
mensions
325150270 (RTS201
10)
521258348 (AL CASE)
Conttrol Interface Cable
2M
Operrating Temperrature
-20+50
AC180~2664 @ Select AC220V
Pow
wer input
AC 90~1322 @ Select AC
C110V
Max. 150W
W
ENHA
ANCED TEC
CHNOLOGY
Y
293
14. MAINTANANCE
14.1. Warning Events
In control panel warning led if is lighted up bellow table refer and inspects.
Table 14-1. Warning Events(1/2)
EVENT
EVENT TEXT
EXPLANATION
EVR2A ACTION
USER RECOMMENDED
ACTION
1. Check AC Power NFB
AC POWER
LO/DEASSERT
External power FAIL
2. Check AC Power fuse

3. Check AC supply, ensure AC connector is securely connected
1. Check AC supply
Battery charge circuit

CHGBD FAIL
FAIL
(Value 25V)
BATT FAIL
Battery Discharge or No
Battery
2. Check Battery charge Voltage

(range DC 27 ~ DC 28V)
3. Replace Analog Module
1. BATT DISCHG display

2. NO BATTERY display
1. Check AC Power NFB
1) BATTDISCHG
Battery Discharge
(15V < Value 21V)
2. Check AC Power fuse

-
3. Check AC supply, ensure AC

connector is securely connected
4. Replace Battery charge T.R
SYSTEM
2)
NO Battery
NO BATTERY
(Value < 15V)
SYSPW FAIL
1. Check battery NFB

2. Check battery connection
1. SYS ALARM display
1. +12V FAIL display
2. Protection disabled
2. +5 V FAIL display
System power FAIL
3. -12V FAIL display

4. REF1V FAIL display
POWER
5. REF2V FAIL display

1) +12V FAIL
System power
1. Check System power connection
+12V FAIL
2. Check System power cable fault
(Value 11V, or 13V)

2) +5 V FAIL
3. Replace UPS Module
System power
+5V FAIL
(Value 4.6V, or 5.4V)

3) -12V FAIL
System power
-12V FAIL
(Value -13V, or -11V)
A/D converter
4)
Reference voltage 1
REF1V FAIL
FAIL

Replace A/D Converter Module
(Value 2.3V, or 2.7V)
A/D converter
5)
Reference Voltage 2
REF2V FAIL
FAIL

(Value2.3V,or 2.7V)
294
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Replace A/D Converter Module
Table 14-1. Warning Events(2/2)

EVENT
POWER
DOWN
MODE
EVENT
TEXT
POWER DOWN
GAS LOW
EXPLANATION
Power down mode
Gas pressure Low
EVR2A ACTION
USER RECOMMENDED
ACTION
SYS ALARM display
No problem
Protection disabled
1.Ensure Control cable is securely
(*. Opteional)
connected
2. Check Control cable fault
(Value < 0.1 Bar)
3. Replace Main Processing Module

4. Replace Recloser.
GAS STATUS
1.Ensure Control cable is securely

GAS HIGH
connected
Gas pressure High
(Value > 1.5 Bar)
2. Check Control cable fault

3. Replace Relay Module
4. Replace Recloser
No problem
SETTING
SYSTEM RESTART
SET CHANGE
Setting Changed
RESTART
System restarted
No problem
COLD RST
Cold Restarted
No problem
P-ROM FAIL
S-ROM FAIL
Parallel EEPROM
SYS ALARM display
Replace Main Processing Module
SYS ALARM display
SYS ALARM display
FAIL
Serial EEPROM
FAIL
D-RAM FAIL
Data RAM FAIL
S-RAM FAIL
Setting RAM FAIL
2. Change to Default
Setting
MEMORY
R-RAM FAIL
RTC NV RAM FAIL
SYS ALARM display
2. Set up time & data at
RTC FAIL
RTC Time FAIL
RTC BAT LO
RTC Battery LOW
0 hr., 0 min. and 0

sec. on Jan. 1, 200.
I-VAL FAIL
Initial Value FAIL
SYS ALARM display
Replace RTC Battery
1. Execute All Clear Event
2. Store Value Clear
2. Execute System Restart

I-SET FAIL
COMMUNICATION
Ect.
C-BD FAIL
Initial Setting Value

FAIL
1. Execute System Restart
2. Change to Default
Setting
Communication
Communication restart
Replace Communication Module
SYS ALARM display
Option Board FAIL
AD BUSY
A/D Conversion BUSY
ORER-ALM
Trip Counter Alarm
WEAR-ALM
Main
Alarm
Contact
Wear
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
1. Check Recloser.
1. Check Recloser.
295
14.2. Malfunction Events

The following table of events describes the malfunction events available from the control and
what they indicate. It also suggests steps to follow to assist in determining why the event was
generated.
Table 14-2. Malfunction Events
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE CAUSE
RECOMMENDED ACTION
1 Connection state of control cable
2. control Box inside CN8 connection state check
- Table 13-2
Control Cable
- Figure 13-8 - Figure 13-9
- Figure 13-10 - Figure 13-15 Reference

OPERATION FAIL
Operation Fail
- Figure 13-10 Reference

1.That control switch point of contact check
2. control Box inside FUSE state check
Etc..
- Figure 13-31 Reference

3. Replace Relay Module
4. Replace Recloser
Current measure
Fail of current &
- Table 13-2
Control Cable
voltage measurement
Voltage measure
- Figure 13-8
- Figure 13-9

- Table 13-2
296
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

02 130205 V7.13 EVRC2A-N6, NT Manual Control

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

02 130205 V7.13 EVRC2A-N6, NT Manual Control

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Release Date: Feb. 2013 / Manual Revision: 7.

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT

Forerunner Distribution & Automation

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT

[Oct. 2006] Ver4.00

Add explanations for new additional function below

[Sept. 2007] Ver4.10

Add explanations for new additional function below

[Sept. 2009] Ver4.12

Add explanations for new additional function below

[Jan. 2010] Ver5.00

Support ETIMS(ENTEC Integration Management Software) function(add the setup menu).

Separate Communication setting into Protocol and Port settings.

Add CLOSE Function at Normal Frequency restored in Frequency element.

Add Fault Trip(option) in EVENT RECORDER menu.

[Jul. 2010] Ver5.10

Add contents of RVD(Resistance Voltage Divider), one of Voltage Divider Inputs.

[Sep. 2010] Ver5.11

Add 6.10. Set Group Change.

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT

[Mar. 2011] Ver5.20

Add Loss of Phase in PROTECTION menu according to an additional function (option),

Add Supply Outage Measurement as an additional function in menu.

[Jan. 2012] Ver6.00

Change the terms related with battery testing.

[Feb. 2012] Ver6.01

Add Power Quality set-up in SYSTEM SETUP menu.

Change Supply Outage to Power Quality in some menus.

Add HARMONICS in MAIN MENU/6.METERING menu.

[Jun. 2012] Ver6.02

Section to be rectified in the manual as a result of adding measuring function of

Section to be rectified in the manual as a result of adding detection function of

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT

- Change RECORDER in 1.2. Summary of Features.

Section to be rectified in the manual as a result of changed range of reclose interval 1.

[Aug. 2012] Ver7.00

Change 5.3. Clock.

Change 5.8. Time Set & Display Type.

Change 9.3. Clock.

Change 10.1.4. Synchro Voltage.

Change Table 14-1. Warning Events in 14.1. Warning Events.

[Nov. 2012] Ver7.10

Changed the manual based on EVRC2A_NT firmware V7.04 upgrading.

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT

SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE menu.

Changed the manual based on EVRC2A_NT firmware V7.06 upgrading.

Add the Note in 6.4. System Power.

[Nov. 2012] Ver7.12

[Dec. 2012] Ver7.12

Add the Note in 5.2.5. EVENT&ETC.

[Feb. 2013] Ver7.13

Add the Notes in 2.4. Protection Elements.

Add the Note in 9.4. Control Type.

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT

3. USER INTERFACE PANEL ........................................................................................ 23

4. SELECT SETBANK ..................................................................................................... 40

6. SYSTEM SETUP ........................................................................................................... 82

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT

6.4. System Power .................................................................................................................... 88

7. PROTECTION ............................................................................................................ 120

8. MONITORING ........................................................................................................... 208

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT

8.8. EXT Trip & Lock Option ............................................................................................ 220